Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit EL19-0299 - SHOWALTER MIDDLE SCHOOL - PROVIDE ELECTRICAL POWER AND SYSTEMS CONNECTIONS FROM THE SHOWALTER MS MAIN MAIN BUILDING TOSHOWALTER MIDDLE SCHOOL 4628 S 144 ST ELI 9-0299 Parcel No: Address: City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: http://www.TukwiiaWA.gov 1523049164 4628 S 144TH ST ELECTRICAL PERMIT Project Name: SHOWALTER MIDDLE SCHOOL Permit Number: EL19-0299 Issue Date: 6/3/2019 Permit Expires On: 11/30/2019 Owner: Name: Address: Contact Person: Name: Address: Contractor: Name: Address: License No: Lender: Name: Address: TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT 4640 S 144TH ST, TUKWILA, WA, 98168 ALEXANDER CLARK AIA 105 SOUTH MAIN ST ##323 , SEATTLE, WA, 98116 SCOTT'S ELECTRIC SERVICE LLC 23811 STATE ROUTE 2 , MONROE, WA, 98272 SCOTTES969RA I!/ Phone: (206) 624-4222 Phone: (206) 898-6308 Expiration Date: 2/20/2021 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROVIDE ELECTRICAL POWER AND SYSTEMS CONNECTIONS FROM THE SHOWALTER MS MAIN MAIN BUILDING TO THE TEMPORARY PORTABLE CLASSROOMS. Valuation of single family: $0,00 Valuation of mf/comm: $85,000.00 Type of Work: ADDITION Fees Collected: $1,897.13 Electrical Service Provided by: SEATTLE CITY LIGHT Water District: 125 Sewer District: VALLEY VIEW Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: International Residential Code Edition: International Mechanical Code Edition: Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: International Fuel Gas Code: Permit Center Authorized Signature: 2015 2015 2015 2015 2015 National Electrical Code: WA Cities Electrical Code: WAC 296-46B: WA State Energy Code: 2017 2017 2017 2015 Date: 1 p . I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this .er it do-. not pre me to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws r=gu sting .nstruc ... or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development perm t . d air: e to t - onditions attached to this permit. Signature: 'r Date: Wi9 Print Name:>C.,Ot v-���' This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: ***ELECTRICAL PERMIT CONDITIONS*** 2: A copy of the electrical work permit shall be posted or otherwise made readily accessible to the Electrical Inspector at each work site. 3: Approved plans shall be maintained at the construction site and shall be readily available to the Electrical Inspector. 4: All electrical work shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 - NEC, and requirements for electrical installations, Chapter 296-46B WAC and the Washington Cities Electrical Code. 5: When any portion of the electrical installation is to be hidden from view by permanent placement of parts of the building, such equipment shall not be concealed until it has been inspected and approved by the Electrical Inspector. 6: The issuance of an electrical work permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of the provisions of the electrical code or other ordinances of the jurisdiction. Permits or related documentation that presumes to grant this authority are therefore not valid. 7: Any change in the scope of work described by the electrical work permit shall require additional work permits. Where approved plans have been issued, revisions to the plans and additional review may be required. PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 2100 ELECTRICAL FINAL 7003 ROUGH -IN ELECTRICAL 7002 SERVICE 7001 UNDERGROUND/SLAB CITY OF TUK 1 Community Development Department Perrnit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://www.TukwilaWA.gov L11-61 Electrical Permit No. 0 Project No. )(1 Date Application Accepted: Date Application Expires: (For office use only) ELECTRICAL PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. **Please Print** Site Address: 462 S. 144TH STREET Tenant Name: TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT King Co Assessor's Tax No.:152304-9108_ Suite Number: PROPERTY OWNER Name: TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Address: 4626 S. 144TH STREET City: TUKWILA State: WA Zip: 98168 CONTACT PERSON — person receiving all project communication Name: ALEXANDER CLARK Address: 105 S. MAIN STREET, SUITE 323 City: SEATTLE State: WA Zip: 98104 Phone: (206) 624-4222 Fax: Email: alex.clark@rolludaarchitects.com New Tenant: Floor: Yes IXI ..No ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: TBD Address: City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.; Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 85,000 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): Provide electrical power and systems connections from the Showalter MS main building to the temporary portable classrooms. Will service be altered? El Yes El No Adding more than 50 amps? ED Yes CD No Type of Use: Type of work: 1:1 New [X] Addition El Service Change 1=1 Remodel D Low Voltage 0 Generator El Fire Alarm El Telecommunication Property Served by: ID Puget Sound Energy II Seattle City Light WAPermit Center \Applications -Handouts \Permit Applications \PDF's\ Electrical Permit Application Revised -17-19.docx El Tenant Improvement o Temporary Service Pa rn. 1 RESIDENTIAL NEW RESIDENTIAL SERVICE 0 New single family dwellings $180,00 (including an attached garage) O Garages, pools, spas and outbuildings $120.00 ea 0 Low voltage systems (alarm) $60.00 ea RESIDENTIAL REMODEL AND SERVICE CHANGES 0 Service change or alteration $120.00 (no added/altered circuits) 0 Service change with added/altered circuits $100.00 number of added circuits $10.00 ea O Circuits added/altered without service change.„„ $60.00 (up to 5 circuits) O Circuits added/altered without service change.... ... $60.00 (6 or more circuits)............. ...... ............ $10,00 ea El Meter/mast repair $80.00 o Low voltage systems $60.00 (alarm, fiirnace thermostat) MULTI -FAMILY AND COMMERCIAL Fees are based on the valuation of the electrical contract, MISCELLANEOUS FEES O Temporary service (residential) $60.00 0 Temporary service (generator) $90.00 O Manufactured/mobile home service $100.00 (excluding garage or outbuilding) El Carnivals $100.00 Number of concessions $11.00 ea Each ride and generator truck $11.00 ea ***EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1, 2014 EACH PERMIT WILL BE ASSESSED A 5% TECHNOLOGY FEE*** PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES - Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one extension of time for an additional period not to exceed 90 days. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER 0 Signature: CAL CTOR: atimk-s 140444.4.5-bk-twa..) Date: ALEXAN ER CLARK (206) 624-4222 Print Name: Day Telephone: Mailing Address: 1 S. MAIN STREET, SUITE 323 SEATTLE WA 98104 City State Zip W: \ Permit Center \ App I icatio ns-Ilando uts Permit Applications \ PDFs \ Electrical Permit Application Revised 1 - 1 7- 19.docx Cash Register Receipt City of Tukwila Receipt. Number •' _ DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ACCOUNT QUANTITY PAID . $ , 897 13 EL19-0299 Address: 4628 S 144TH ST Apn: 1523049164 $1,897.13 ELECTRICAL $1,824.16 PERMIT FEE MULTI-FAM/COMM R000.322.101.00.00 0.00 $1,459.33 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.832.00.00 0.00 $364.83 TECHNOLOGY FEE $72.97 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID BY RECEIPT: R17352 R000.322.900.04,00 0.00 $72.97 $1,897.13 Date Paid: Friday, April 05, 2019 Paid By: TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Pay Method: CHECK 98984 Printed: Friday, April 05, 2019 2:52 PM 1 of 1 CAWS YSTEMS INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PE' iViiT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: ./ Type f Inspection. L �� � • Address: /r Lfb2 5 (.� 4 _ $/ Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 7 a.m. Requester: Phone No: 244,grg `f+' Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. OMMENTS: nspecto Date: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Project: Type n i o dr/ Address: 416'a i 1sr Date Cafled: Special Instructions: or- , ' Date Wanted: 1 8 2,v7 a.m.-‘ p.m. Requester: Phone No: V/ g Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approvai. COMMENTS: , , 4C _ , 6p,5re-6---(e F6C—P15ic . hT Inspector: Date: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PRM1T NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-367 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: Type of Inspection: Address. fr/yJ Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: Requester: Phone No: XApproved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: Corrections required prior to approval. nspec Date: REINSPECTIO$4 FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms MEW! a SCHOOL DISTRICT Project No. 331-17-01 Date of Specifications: March 28, 2019 PERMIT DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANUAL Divisions 26-28 rolluda architects 105 South Main St., Suite 323 Seattle, Washington 98104 206.624.4222 tel 206.624.4226 fax www. RolludaArchitects.com D F PLIANCg.VVITH NFPA 70 - NEC MAY 28 2019 City of Tukwila UILDING DIVISION_A nEcEivEn CITY OF TUKWILA APR 05 2019 lc/ lot fi) qg PERMIT CENTER DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL 260500 COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 260501 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 12 10 260519 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER 8 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING 4 260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 2 260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 14 260541 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL 12 CONSTRUCTION 260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 8 260800 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6 262200 LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 6 262717 262726 EQUIPMENT WIRING WIRING DEVICES 4 20 262818 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 4 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS 271000 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 8 272000 INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 16 272172 CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 12 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 283100 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 18 V3r Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4628 S 144th St, Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 WORK INCLUDES A. Provide supervision, labor, materials, tools, equipment/machinery, temporary power and lighting and other services necessary to complete the work for complete operations described herein and shown on the Drawings. B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: The provisions and intent of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and General Requirements apply to the work as if specified in this section and other sections of the Specifications. Provide the electrical work as indicated or as specified in other sections of the Specifications and Drawings of the Contract Documents. C. Provide installation means and methods of all equipment, devices, light fixtures, raceways, wires/cabling, junction boxes and the like per industry standard practice and code requirements as necessary for proper configuration and operation as if herein specified or shown. D. Provide and install all equipment included in the Contract in harmony with other trades to provide completed systems with neat, finished appearance, using approved methods of the trade. Only good workmanship will be accepted. If, in the judgment of the Owner's Representative, any portion of the work not installed in a workmanlike manner or left in a rough, unfinished condition, remove the equipment, reinstall same, patch and paint surrounding surfaces satisfactory to the Owner's Representative, with no additional cost to the Owner. E. Mounting details of equipment, devices, light fixtures, raceways, junction boxes and the like are not usually shown or specified. Provide per industry standard practice and code requirements as necessary for proper installation and operation the same as if herein specified or shown. F. All installations shall comply with ADA guidelines and requirements. Coordinate all installations with Architect to ensure this requirement is satisfied. 26 05 00 - 1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms .11.110.1 1.4 PERMITS & FEES COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 A. Purchase permits, licenses, and approvals required for execution of work and include purchase price in the bid. 1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Execute electrical work in strict accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code, NFPA, IBC, IFC, WA State NREC-2015, and governing local ordinances, codes, and regulations. Assure the strict conformity of Electrical equipment, materials, construction methods, tests, and definitions with the established standards of the following in their latest adopted revision: Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc., and the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. 1.6 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS A. These Specifications and Drawings are intended to cover a completed installation of systems. The omission of expressed reference to any item of labor or material for the proper execution of the work in accordance with present practice of the trade shall not relieve the Contractor from providing such labor and materials. Refer to the Drawings and Shop Drawings or other trades for additional details, which affect the proper installation of this work. 1.7 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to Division 01. B. The tern "approved equal" means final approval by the Architect of a material or piece of equipment substituted for that which is shown in the Specifications or Plans. C. The word "provide" as used in these Specifications and on the Drawings shall mean, "furnish, install and complete connection per factory instructions". D. The term Mechanical Contractor (M.C.) and Electrical Contractor (E.C.) as used in these Specifications or on the Contract Drawings, refer to those subcontractors working under the direction of the General Contractor (G.C.). E. The term Engineer" shall refer to the licensed professional electrical engineer who is responsible for the preparation of the electrical documents. 1.8 WORKMANSHIP A. Conform to NEC 110.12 B. Conform to latest edition of NECA standard for good workmanship in electrical construction manual. 26 05 00 - 2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 C. Provide all equipment included and as necessary and in harmony with other trades to provide completed systems with neat, finished appearance, using approved methods of the trade. Only good workmanship will be accepted. If, in the judgment of the Owner's Representative, any portion of work has not been installed in a workmanlike manner or left in a rough, unfinished condition, remove the equipment, reinstall same, patch and paint surrounding surfaces satisfactory to the Owner's Representative, with no increase in cost to the Owner. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: These Specifications and Drawings are intended to cover a completed installation of systems. The omission of expressed reference to any item of labor or material for the proper execution of the work in accordance with present practice of the trade shall not relieve the Contractor from providing such labor and materials. Refer to Drawings and shop drawings or other trades for additional details, which affect the proper installation of this work. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code). C. Conform to latest edition of NECA standard for good workmanship in electrical construction manual. D. Furnish products listed by Underwriters Laboratories as suitable for the location and purpose intended. E. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate generally the locations of materials and equipment, and shall be followed as closely as possible. Coordinate the work under this Division with Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Mechanical, and the drawings of other trades for exact dimensions, clearances, and roughing -in locations. Cooperate with other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others. F. Field verify all existing conditions, equipment, panelboards, raceway/conductor paths and coordinate demolition and new work with existing conditions. Provide all required core drilling, sealing and patching as required for new work routed through existing walls, floors and roof. Coordinate all work with Architect, Owner and other Trades prior to commencing work. 1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conform to Division 01. B. The naming of a certain brand or make or manufacturer in the Specifications is to establish a quality standard for the article desired. The Contractor is not restricted to the use of the specific brand of the manufacturer named unless so indicated in the Specifications or notified during bidding. However, substitution request is required and permitted only with the written approval of the Engineer. No substitute material or equipment shall be purchased, ordered, fabricated shipped or processed in any manner prior to the approval of the Architect/Engineer. The 26 05 00 - 3 ,44A. Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Contractor shall assume all responsibility for additional expenses as required in any way to meet changes from the original material or equipment specified. If notice of substitution is not furnished to the Engineer within 30-days after the General Contract is awarded, then equipment and materials named in the Specifications are to be used. C. The equipment specification may also show on the Drawings the type, appearance, rating, and basic quality/functionality desired. D. The Contractor shall assume full financial responsibility for any and all additional expenses arising from the use of a substitute product. 1.1 l PRIOR APPROVALS A. All substitutions approved prior to bidding shall be listed in the addendums. B. Specifications have been written around equipment and materials selected for this project based on quality, size capacity and performance required to meet building design criteria. All equipment and materials used in this project which have not been specified must have prior approval from Engineer. C. Request for Approval must be submitted in original, typed letter fotiii to Engineer ten (10) working days (holidays excluded) prior to bid date. This letter shall be accompanied with full data, system operation, and application information, size of equipment regarding items to be substituted. If supplier wants reply to request for approval, please send self addressed, stamped envelope with request. Prior approval requests communicated via a facsimile machine (FAX) will not be accepted. D. Supplier and/or Electrical Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that substituted material or equipment is of same size, quality, capacity, weight, and electrical characteristics as that specified. Any changes and costs required during construction due to Contractors/supplier neglect to properly select substituted equipment shall be paid by the Contractor/supplier. Prior approval to bid does not mean final approval of material or equipment by Engineer. Final approval will be given after final submitted data has been presented to Engineer complete with full information regarding weights, capacities, size, electrical requirements and quality. 1.12 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Division 01. B. Provide only complete submittals. Submittals shall be organized and identified by specification section number and name. Submit either by entire section(s) or for the entire project. Incomplete submittals will be returned immediately. C. Where product data and shop drawings are specified for the work, submit both at the same time. Failure to do so will be considered an incomplete submittal. D. Provide original quality, hard copies of all submittals. Inferior quality copies, fax, or emails will not be reviewed. 26 05 00 - 4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 E. Each submitted product data, selection, and options must be clearly identified. Improper identification or lack thereof of materials will result in rejected submittals. F. Where specified, shop drawings shall be 24"x36" size similar to contract drawings. Drawings shall be produced in AutoCAD and shall include, but not be limited to, symbol legend, all devices, wiring diagrams, controls, transformers, relays etc., one -line diagrams, details and other pertinent installation instructions and manufacturer recommendations. 1.13 CONTRACTORS COST BREAKDOWN A. Conform to Division 01. B. Electrical Contractor shall provide a cost breakdown schedule of values. C. Electrical Contractor shall provide a list of work excluded from his bid to the GC at time of bid. D. Cost breakdown schedule of values shall be organized by specification sections and shall provide detail breakout for both labor and materials of the costs per the following: 1. Rough -in. 2. Trim -out. 3. Testing. 4. Commissioning. E. Provide additional line item cost breakdown per the above requirements for work specified on the drawings which may not be reflected within the specifications. These items shall be broken out by building area, or room as approved by Architect. 1.14 CLOSEOUT DOCUMENTS A. Conform to Division 01. B. As -Built Drawings: This Contractor shall maintain a set of Contract Plans at the site on which current changes and the actual location of conduits, devices, equipment, etc., as installed, shall be marked in red pencil in a legible, neat manner. This set of Plans shall show actual dimensions, including depth of underground conduits and feeders from construction lines so they can be readily found after covering. This set of Plans will be reviewed monthly by Architect and Engineer prior to approvals of pay request. Submit a set of Electrical Drawings marked in red to indicate the routing of conduit runs to the Engineer for review at the completion of conduit rough -in and prior to cover. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit the as -built information on a set of reproducible sepias made from the original Contract Document tracings and presented to the Architect and Engineer for approvals. C. Documents: Bind three (3) complete sets of the following documents in a hard -backed three- ring binder and present to the Architect prior to final acceptance of the project: 1. Letter from the Electrical Sub -Contractor stating the electrical portion of the project is complete and that all punch list items have been completed. 2. Gurantee letter. 3. Electrical Inspection Certificate. 26 05 00 - 5 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms fgAN ••-r COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 4. Copies of all permits. 5. Operating and Maintenance Manuals, operating instructions. 6. Guarantees (other than one year). D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Confol in to Division 1. E. Warranties: 1. Warranty workmanship and all components of the work for a period of one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the installation. Remedy any defects in workmanship and repair or replace any faulty equipment which fails within the warranty period without additional cost to the Owner. Assure cleanliness of light fixtures, lamps and replacement of defective units at the time of final acceptance. 2. Submit one year warrantee on all materials under the contract work (excluding lamps). 3. Submit all subcontractor warranties. 4. Submit all manufacture warranties. 1.15 SCHEDULING, DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Schedule all materials, equipment and light fixture deliveries and make all arrangements as necessary to complete all work in accordance with the project construction schedules. Provide schedules of work to Architect as directed during construction. B. Schedule deliveries and unloading to prevent traffic congestion, blocking of access, and interference with work. Arrange deliveries to avoid larger accumulations than can be suitably stored at site. Provide for continuity of supply to avoid change of supplier or change in brand of materials during any phase of work. C. Deliver packaged materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened, labeled containers. Do not open containers until approximate time for use. Store materials at locations that will not interfere with progress of work. Arrange locations of storage areas in approximately order of intended use. D. Store materials in a manner that will prevent damage to materials or structure, and that will prevent injury to persons. Store cementitious materials in dry, weathertight, ventilated spaces. Store ferrous materials to prevent contact with ground and to avoid rusting and damage from weather. E. Provide documents to Architect for any claim of material, equipment and light fixture deliveries not able to meet construction schedules. 1.16 SITE EXAMINATION A. Before submitting bid, Contractor is strongly encouraged to visit the site and examine all adjoining existing buildings, temporary power and communication service, equipment and space conditions on which his/her work is in any way dependent for the best workmanship and operation according to the intent of the Specifications and Drawings. He/she shall report to the Architect any condition which might prevent him/her from installing equipment in the manner intended. 26 05 00 - 6 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 B. Identify existing conditions and requirements for cutting, patching, excavation, core drilling, etc. C. Include all costs to provide the electrical installation associated with the existing conditions for the best workmanship and operation according to the intent of the Specifications and Drawings. D. Report to Owner's Representative any condition that might prevent the installation of equipment in the manner intended. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Naming of manufacturers indicates the manufacturer's brand name is acceptable only if their product is in compliance with each and every provision of the Specifications. Failure to comply will result in disapproval. B. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that materials or equipment are of same size, quality, capacity, weight, and electrical characteristics as that specified. The Contractor shall pay any changes and costs required during construction due to the Contractor's neglect to properly select equipment. C. Notify the Owner's Representative for an on -site visit to inspect material and equipment prior to installation. D. Materials and equipment shall be new, undamaged, and shall be UL listed for its intended location and use. E. Defects and damages of material shall be replaced. Furnish new material as necessary and install the equipment for a completed system at no additional cost to the Owner. F. Furnish material and equipment samples when requested by the Owner's Representative, within 21-days of request. G. Non -approved material and equipment must be removed from the jobsite. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Conform to section Division 1. B. All device or equipment mounting heights given herein the Specifications, Contract Drawing, and/or documents are intended to provide general guidelines pursuant to industry standards. Such guidelines may not be exact or accurate and may or may not conflict with other trade's installation without verification. The Contractor will require in his bid, to provide field coordination and verification with other contractors, trades, or any shop drawings, and to insure that such mounting heights if indeed are practical and feasible as not to conflict with other 26 05 00 - 7 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms Acik COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 installation and construction. If conflicts are discovered at any time during the construction, report to Engineer or Architect immediately for resolution. Before any installation, all devices or equipment can be directed or located by Engineer or Architect within 20 feet of the designed contract location without any extra cost. C. If the Contractor fails to provide such coordination and field verification and results of erroneous installation, the Contractor shall remedy such installations per Architect's direction, at Contractor's cost. D. Cutting and Patching: 1. Conform to Division 01. 2. Perfoi in core drilling, cutting, patching, and restoration work as may be necessary for the proper installation of the electrical work. 3.2 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Apply, install, connect, and erect manufactured items or materials according to the recommendations, wiring diagrams, instructions of the manufacturer when such recommendations are not illustrated or in conflict with the Contract Documents. B. Furnish to the Architect, on request, copies of manufacturer's recommendations. Secure approval of recommendations before proceeding with work. C. Keep at the site not less than one copy, in good condition, of manufacturer's recommendations, wiring diagrams, instructions, or directions, pertaining to work at the site. Inform involved personnel of requirements and availability of manufacturer's recommendations. 3.3 PREPARATORY WORK A. Inspection: Prior to all work of this Section, carefully inspect the work of all other trades and verify the completeness of all such work to the point where this work may properly commence. B. Discrepancies: Do not proceed with the work in the event of a discrepancy until resolved by the Architect. C. Change Orders: Where changes of work require additional cost, prepare complete cost/credit breakdown herein specified and comply with change order requirements as specified in Division 01, Contract Documents. No cost will be allowed for as -built drawings on any change order unless otherwise instructed. 3.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the specified work under this contract with work of other trades for exact dimensions, clearances, and roughing -in locations. Cooperate with other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others. B. The drawings are diagrammatic and indicate generally the locations of materials and equipment. These drawings shall be followed as closely as possible. The Electrical Contractor 26 05 00 - 8 eiss Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 shall coordinate the work under this section with the architectural, structure, plumbing, heating and air conditioning, and the drawings of other trades for exact dimensions, clearances, and roughing -in locations. This Contractor shall cooperate with all other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others. C. The Contractor is to coordinate his work with the General Contractor (Ceiling Contractor) so that all above -ceiling work is completed, inspected and accepted by the Owner prior to ceiling installation. Final adjustments can be made later. D. Coordinate all electrical work with mechanical installations. Verify with Mechanical Contractor for final mechanical equipment locations prior to work. Connect all power wiring to mechanical equipment through starters, contactors as required. Maintain clearances around mechanical equipment to allow access for maintenance per NEC codes and local codes. E. Refer to Architectural specifications for project construction schedules. Schedule each specific area so that the delivery of materials and equipment are such as to cause no delay in construction schedule. Include the premium cost of delivery of equipment and overtime work in order to comply with the construction schedules if necessary. F. Electrical Contractor to coordinate and verify exact locations of all wiring devices, light fixtures, fire alarm and communication devices and equipment with Architects in field prior to beginning of rough -in. G. If directed by the Architects, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, verify with local inspectors or authorities having jurisdiction and make reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades or for proper execution of the work. H. If directed by the Architect, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, provide layouts of equipment and details of mounting method for Engineer's approval prior to installation to ensure proper execution of the work. 1. All devices, outlets, cabinets, equipment, panels, light fixtures, switches can be field located by Architect within 20 feet of the designed locations prior to rough -in work without extra compensation. J. During its progress, all work shall be subject to observation by the Architect, Engineer, and/or their representatives, and of the State and Local Electrical Inspectors. The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor will be totally responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Architect and Engineer to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractors' safety measures in, on, or near the construction site. K. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction" in the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall consult with the State or Federal Safety Inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether he is or is not in compliance with state or federal regulations. Furthermore, the 26 05 00 - 9 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms Al'"4 '"veve/ fr.1b. COMMON WO FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 Contractor distinctly assumes all risk of damages or injury to any persons or property wherever located, resulting from any action or operation under this contract or in connection with the work. 3.5 RACEWAYS A. All one -lines, risers, and conduit routing are schematic and are not showing exact physical arrangement of equipment. Where indicated on Drawings, all junction boxes and pull boxes are minimum requirements. Electrical Contractor to provide all other fittings and pull boxes of adequate size in the raceway system wherever necessary or required by National Electrical Code. Allow a maximum of four quarter bends between pull boxes in each run of conduits. B. Provide expansion joint fittings for conduits passing through new or existing expansion joints installed between buildings. Verify exact locations and details of expansion joints prior to work. C. Coordinate all conduit routing, pull box and equipment locations with other trades to avoid conflicts of equipment installations. D. All empty conduits shall have pull wires. E. Provide unistrut mounting channels, hanger rods, anchor bolts and all fittings to support conduits and pull boxes. F. All work shall comply with National Electrical Code requirements. G. Electrical Contractor shall anchor and brace all conduits (2" in diameter and larger) per Building Codes. 3.6 MISCELLANEOUS A. Support all conduits and equipment in accordance with the National Electrical Code, International Building Code, and other applicable codes. B. Cutting and Patching: The Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching as may be necessary for the proper installation of the electrical work. Grout around all raceway penetrations and fill all anchor bolt holes or spalled areas. Core drill new penetrations through existing structural walls, ceilings and floor slabs. C. Cleanup: The premises must be kept free of accumulated materials, rubbish, and debris at all times. Surplus material, tools, and equipment must not be stored at the building. At the completion of the job, all equipment fixtures shall be left clean and in proper condition for their intended use. D. Nameplates: Provide nameplates for all electrical equipment. A partial list includes, but is not limited to the following: All controls, wall switch for fans, disconnect switches, switchboard devices, transformers, lighting control devices, all panelboards, and all cabinets. E. Remove all temporary markings, etc., from devices when installing nameplates. Nameplates shall be engraved phenolic, white letters on black background, letter height 1/4" unless a lack 26 05 00 - 10 411111111H, Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 of space requires smaller nameplate. Minimum overall height 1/2", length as required. Install with screws or pop rivets; glue is NOT approved. F. Demolition: Shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor as indicated on Plans and pursuant to Section 26 05 05, Division 01 and Division 02. G. Installation Details: Prepare and submit to the Owner's Representative detail sketches indicating equipment installation information with locations, dimensions and weights. H. Tests: Test all wiring and all electrical equipment to verify absence of grounds and short circuits and verify proper operation, rotation, and phase relationship. Demonstrate operation of all equipment in accordance with the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations. Perform tests in the presence of the Owner's Representative. Provide all instruments and personnel required to conduct these tests. 3.7 DRAFT STOPS, FIRE STOPS AND ENCLOSURES A. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to verify with Architects and other trades to maintain the fire -resistance rating of the walls, partitions, floors or ceiling tops whenever his work requires penetration and opening for equipment installation of these areas. Provide and use approved methods and fire seal material and fitting to maintain the fire resistance rating. All flush -mounted panels where installed on fire rated walls, the Electrical Contractor to provide approved fire rated enclosures of double gypsum wall board for the electrical panels to maintain the wall fire resistance rating. Where panels are semi -flush mounted, provide painted oak wood trim. B. Verify with Architectural Plans and maintain the integrity of the draft stops, fire stops and fire enclosures whenever work requires penetration through or installation within these areas. Patch as required to comply with codes and to provide integrity of stops. C. Locate devices horizontally a minimum of 2' apart on opposing sides of a fire separation wall to maintain lire rating of wall. 3.8 CONTINUITY OF BUILDING AND UTILITY SERVICES AND SHUTDOWNS A. Continuity of utilities services in the building shall be maintained at all times as required to provide heat, water, lighting, and power to all portions of the building. Utility systems shutdowns required for extensions, alterations or connections of new services shall be accomplished in accordance with the following requirements: B. Shutdowns: Utilities shutdowns shall be scheduled for week -ends, holidays, or at night if the shutdown affects the use of the building or surrounding buildings. The actual time and date will be coordinated with, and approved by the Owner at least 72 hours in advance. C. Costs: Pay all costs associated with utilities shutdowns. No extra payment will be made for overtime work, schedule changes, or failure to complete utilities connections within authorized shutdown periods. 26 05 00 - 11 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms fr \ NM, Alak COMMON WORK FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 00 3.9 INSTRUCTION PERIODS FOR OWNER'S PERSONNEL A. Scope: Following installation of work, have representatives of installation tradesmen conduct demonstrations and instruction periods to point out locations of servicing points and required points of maintenance to Owner's representatives. B. General Description Of Instruction Periods: Each period shall include preliminary discussion, and presentation of information from maintenance manuals with appropriate references to Drawings; followed by tours of building areas explaining maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, and equipment cleaning procedures, control settings and available adjustments. C. Scheduling Of Instruction Periods: Notice of Contractor's readiness to conduct such instruction and demonsiration shall be given to Owner's Representative at least two (2) weeks prior to the instruction periods, and agreement reached as to the date at which the instruction periods are to be performed. Advise Owner's Representative two (2) weeks prior to date when ready to conduct instructions and demonstrations; receive approvals of proposed date prior to making final arrangeinents. END OF SECTION 26 05 00 26 05 00 - 12 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 — GENERAL BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 1.1 GENERAL A. Confonn to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4628 S 144th St, Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE A. Devices, material, equipment, enclosures, and assemblies shall be new, UL listed, approved, and suitable for its environment where used. B. Unless noted otherwise, wiring systems shall be installed in a complete raceway system. C. Determine the exact electrical requirements of equipment from the equipment suppliers prior to rough in. Refer any discrepancy between the Drawings and equipment requirements to the Architect for resolution prior to installation. D. All installations shall comply with ADA guidelines and requirements. E. Construction Observation: Advise the Architect at least two (2) full working days prior to the covering of concealed electrical work. 1.4 EQUIPMENT FINISH A. Electrical equipment, control panels, and cabinets, shall be furnished factory painted in the manufacturer's standard colors unless otherwise specified. B. Unfinished materials and equipment except conduit, shall be cleaned, primed and painted by the Electrical Contractor as directed by the Owner's Representative in accordance with the Painting Section of the Specifications. C. The colors of exposed electrical material and apparatus shall be as selected by the Owner's Representative. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source: For each type of material required for the Work of this Section, provide primary materials which are the products of one manufacturer. Provide secondary materials which are acceptable to the manufacturers of the primary materials. 26 05 01 - 1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS Ak BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 A. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Hot dipped galvanized. Fittings shall be steel compression type only. Screw type fittings are not acceptable. B. Flexible Steel Conduit: Interlocking single strip, hot -dipped galvanized or sherardized, liquid -tight when used in wet or damp locations. Fittings shall be screw wedge type or liquid -tight type depending on conduit type used. Provide grounding fittings for ground wire installation outside conduit. C. Pull Cords: Provide a pull cord in all empty raceways and raceways for communications, sound, computer and telephone systems. Pull cords shall have easy to read distance markings in 1-foot increments and have a 140-Ib minimum tensile strength. Cords shall be manufactured by Ideal Industries, Inc. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE A. Branch circuit wiring shall be #12 AWG copper minimum unless indicated otherwise. Conductors shall be stranded copper with Code grade insulation and a minimum temperature rating of 75° C. B. Branch circuit ground wire, equipment grounding conductor and grounding electrode conductors shall be insulated the same as the circuit or feeder conductors. C. Conductors #8 and larger shall be connected to equipment by means of compression type terminal lugs. Compression lugs shall be applied via hydraulic compression only. Manual/ Mechanical compression methods are not acceptable. Provide two -hole lugs of Al/Cu type only. Single hole lugs are not acceptable. D. Marking: Wire must be marked at 2' intervals with gauge, insulation type, and manufacturer. Label feeders at each end of phase designation. E. Low voltage wiring and cables specified herein by Divisions 26, 27, or 28 shall be installed either in complete raceway system or shall be plenum rated. 2.3 BOXES A. Manufacturers: Bower, Raco, Steel City. Boxes exposed to weather shall be Crouse Hinds or equal cast aluminum type. B. Electrical boxes shall conform to UL-50 "Standard for Electrical Enclosures" and UL 514 "Standard for Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings". C. Provide electrical boxes of the material, finish, type and size indicated and required for the location, kind of service, number of wires, and function. D. Electrical boxes that are shown in the Drawings with no indication of size shall be provided in accordance with the NEC. 26 05 01 - 2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 01 E. Junction boxes, pull boxes, and outlet boxes shall be pressed steel with knockouts and matching cover as required with size, depth and shape best suited to the location and intended service. Cover on finish area shall be provided with specification grade quantity type to match finish surface. Include plaster or tile rings as required. F. Provide neoprene gaskets 1/8-inch thick with all boxes subjected to weather. G. Grounding: Provide each box with a grounding terminal. 1. Grounding Terminal: Either a green -colored washer -in -head machine screw not smaller than 10-32 in a drilled and tapped hole in the back of the box, or a grounding bushing with green -colored machine screw terminal attached to one of the conduits. 2. Install grounding jumpers per NEC and as specified in 26 05 26. 2.4 WIRING DEVICES A. General: Wiring devices shall be ivory colored for general use and other colors as specified. B. Devices shall be spec grade 20-amp rated, manufactured by Leviton, as specified below, unless otherwise approved. Approved substitute receptacles are Pass & Seymour #PT5362-I; requires pig -tail connectors. DEVICES CATALOG NUMBER Switch Leviton # 1221-SI 3-way Switch Leviton # 1223-SI. 4-way Switch Leviton # 1224-SI Keyed Switch Leviton # 1221-21L — NO Duplex Receptacle Leviton # 5362-SI Duplex Receptacle in magnetic Leviton # MRI20-I Duplex Receptacle (Emergency) Leviton # 5362-SR Duplex Receptacle w/ USB Chargers Leviton # T5832-HGI G:FCI Duplex Receptacle Leviton # 7899-HGI GFCI Duplex Receptacle (Emergency) Leviton # 7899-HGR C. Switches and Receptacles: 1. Standard Wall Switches: Shall be single -pole, three-way, four-way, or locking as shown on the Drawings. Install switch with ON terminal up. 2. Duplex Receptacles: Shall be 20-amp, 125V, NEMA 5-20 configuration installed with ground terminal up. 3. Finish Plates: Provide brushed -satin stainless steel 0.032" type 302 stainless steel with matching hardware. Provide Pass& Seymour SS series unless otherwise approved. Provide each plate with Etched and filled identification at specified in 3.07 below. Emergency device coverplates shall be inscribed with "EMERGENCY". 4. Blank coverplates: Shall be manufactured of similar materials and finish as those specified above. Blank plates shall be brushed #302 stainless steel with radius contour design, countersunk fastener holes, and shall be provided with matching stainless steel hardware. For custom fabricated coverplates, submit sample to engineer for approval prior to final production. 5. Countertop pedestals: Shall be single -gang, double gang, single face or double face as required for the devices indicated. Where two devices are indicated, provide one 26 05 01 -3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms '‘..wie • I BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 pedestal. Do not intermix types of devices or multiple circuits in pedestals. Provide WaterSaver #E300WS-PB, E400WS-PB, E500WS-PB, E600WS-PB. As required to suit installation of devices shown. 2.5 EQUIPMENT DISCONNECTS A. Disconnect switches shall be heavy duty fusible type, NEMA 1 enclosures for indoor, NEMA 4X for exterior and/or wet locations. B. Approved Manufacturers: Square-D, General Electric, Siemens. 2,6 FUSES A. Unless indicated otherwise, fuses shall be dual element, time -delay type as manufactured by Bussman of McGraw Edison Company. Fuses for circuits shall be sized in accordance with the NEC. Labels indicating the size and type of replacement fuses shall be glued to inside of door on fusible switches and panelboards. 1. Fuses shall be of the current voltage and short circuit rating as required or indicated. 2. Fuses for motors, motor driven equipment, motor operated HVAC mechanical equipment, and motor circuits shall be the Fusetron dual element fuses. 3 Fuses for switchboard, feeders, panelboards, and equipment shall be the low peak current limiting dual element fuses, 4. Spare duplicate sets (3 fuses per set) of fuses of each type and rating shall be provided at the completion of the project. Provide spare fuses in a lockable NEMA-1 fuse cabinet and install at a location directed by the Owner. 5. In the event the Electrical Contractor wishes to furnish materials other than those specified, a written request, along with a complete short circuit and selective coordination study, shall be submitted to the Owner's Representative for evaluation at least ten (10) working days prior to bid date. If the Owner's Representative's evaluation indicates acceptance, an addendum will be issued listing the other acceptable manufacturer. 2.7 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide molded case circuit breakers of the quick -make and quick -break variety equipped with wiping type contacts and with interrupting rating and trip rating indicated on the Drawings. Provide arc chutes and individual trip mechanisms on each pole. Equipment multiple -pole breakers with both a common trip and trip free feature. Trip indication to be independent of breaker On or Off positions. Breaker is to be fully operable in an ambient temperature of 40°C. 2.8 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Provide dedicated blocking and support method to ensure secure installation of all device boxes such that the installation is capable of withstanding a minimum 50-pound pulling force without moving. B. Support raceway by straps, suitable clamps, or hangers to provide a rigid installation. Perforated strap hangers and twisted wire attachments will not be acceptable. Do not support or fasten raceways to other systems or pipes, or in a manner to prevent the ready removal of other pipes. 26 05 01 - 4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 01 2.9 GROUNDING A. Conform to NEC Article 250. B. Ground Wire: Color coded green, copper conductor, with insulation same as circuit or feeder conductors. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor or circuit grounding conductor per NEC 250 in raceway systems. Insulation and conductor type shall be the same as circuit conductors. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. One -line diagrams, risers, and conduit routing are schematic and do not show exact arrangement of equipment. B. Where indicated on Drawings, junction boxes and pull boxes are minimum requirements. Provide other fittings and pull boxes of adequate size in the raceway system wherever necessary or required by NEC. Allow a maximum of four 90-degree bends between pull boxes in each run of conduit. C. For roof -top conduit installation, provide expansion joint fittings and Firestone rubber blocking (to match existing) and assemblies. D. Provide expansion joint fittings for conduits passing through new or existing expansion joints. Refer to existing record drawings for location of expansion joint near grid line S-19810. Verify exact locations and details of expansion joints prior to work. E. Coordinate conduit routing, pull box and equipment locations with other trades to avoid conflicts of equipment installations. Empty conduits shall have pull cords. F. Conceal all raceways except as permitted by Architect. G. Where permitted, exposed raceway shall be run parallel or perpendicular to building. Run raceways as high as possible unless noted otherwise. H. Carefully form bends to avoid injuring or flattening raceway. Raceways 1-inch trade size and larger shall utilize factory formed fittings where bends are 45-degrees or larger. Minor offsets are permitted to be field bent. All bends in conduits serving low -voltage systems shall not have a bend radii less than 10-times the nominal conduit size. Support raceways with heavy duty, one hole, pressed steel straps on interior surfaces. Support pendant mounted raceways on 1/4" rod with pear shaped hanger (up to 2" pipe size) or trapeze type hanger with 3/8" rod, 1-5/8" square preformed channel. Conduit support system shall be dedicated and isolated from other systems and ceiling supports or tees. Conduit installations shall not use ceiling type wire and clips as support system. 26 05 01 - 5 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 01 Anchor all electrical work securely to structure using fasteners approved by a Washington State Licensed Structural Engineer for the types of structure encountered. K. Anchor to frame structure by means of sheet metal screws. Fasten to structural walls with lead anchors or steel expansion shells and threaded bolts or screws with slotted heads. Fasten to architectural or masonry walls with toggle bolts or molley screws. Deviation from these methods must be approved prior to installation. Furnish anchor bolts and anchorage items as required, and field check to insure proper alignment and location. Provide templates, layout drawings, and supervision at the job site to ensure correct placing of anchorage items in concrete. Check embedded items for correctness of location and detail before concrete is installed. Control erection tolerance requirements to not impair the strength, safety, serviceability, or appearance of installations, as approved by the Engineer. Determine exact location of conduit. Route all conduit parallel to building lines. N. Hot -dip galvanize all exterior support hardware after fabrication. O. Install individual conductors in conduits, raceways, ducts, and trenches to complete the wiring systems. P. Install switches and cover plates complete in a neat manner in accordance with the NEC and local codes. 3.2 RACEWAY TYPES A. EMT: Interior areas and exterior areas with approved weatherproof fittings. B. Flexible Conduit: Flexible metal conduit located in wet locations, mechanical room, kitchen areas, shall be liquid tight type. A maximum of 72" of flexible metal conduit shall be used for the connection to motors and vibrating equipment, final connection to lay in light fixtures. Flexible metal conduit shall be continuous grounding type and provide with grounding lug per spec. No flexible conduit allowed for any concealed installation. C. Minimum Sizes: Conduit sizes are not specified on the floor plans. Provide minimum 1/2" conduit for single pole dedicated branch circuits, 3/4" conduit for multi -pole, or combined circuits. Refer to other specification sections for other minimum sizes. Contractor shall provide sizing of conduits as required to meet code where the above specified minimum sizes are too small to afford 40% fill. Conduit sizes shall be sized for conductor types and sizes per NEC. D. Conduit termination shall have code sized junction box for flush or surface installation. Conduit stubs shall have nylon insulated type bushing. E. Pull Cords: Provide pull cords in empty raceways. Cords shall be continuous in each raceway run and extend a minimum distance of 12" from the junction box or terminal at the end of the raceway. 26 05 01 - 6 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 3.3 WIRE AND CABLE BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 A. Branch Circuit Installation: Branch circuit wiring size #10 and smaller shall have continuous color code identification per standard listed below. Tin all stripped ends of wiring #10 and smaller prior to termination under set screws. B. Use no mechanical means for pulling wires, and no lubricant except powdered soapstone or approved substitute. C. Branch circuit splices may be made with 3M Scotch Lok Electrical Spring type connectors up to #8 AWG size, except motor connections. D. Utilize crimp type pressure connectors insulated with tape or prefabricated covers on motor connections and splices of wiring #6 AWG and larger. E. Make no splices in home runs. F. Do not inter -mix wiring from separate raceway systems unless specifically permitted by the Engineer. G. Each single pole branch circuit shall contain a dedicated neutral conductor and equipment grounding conductor of the same size as the hot conductors. Shared neutral conductors and/or multi -pole breakers used on single pole loads are not permitted. H. All wiring shall be identified with permanent wire labels, using alphanumeric designations. All terminations and splices shall be identically labeled for the same wire (i.e. common conductors terminated in multiple locations). Wire labels shall agree with the circuit designations on the as -built drawings. Provide Thomas and Betts, Brady, or equal, printed plastic adhesive tapes to show circuit numbers. Wrap tapes at least two turns around conductor. Color Coding Standards: 1. 30, 4 Wire System: 208Y/120V 480Y/277V Phase A Black Brown Phase B Red Orange Phase C Blue Yellow Neutral White Gray Ground Green Green with (1) yellow stripe 2. Control wiring shall be grey or black with identifying wire numbers at each termination. 3. Color -coded Tape may be used in lieu of color -coded insulation for conductors #4 AWG and larger. However, when color coded tape is used, the conductor insulation shall be black only and shall be tape -identified with color scheme shown above at splices, terminations and junction boxes. Identify conductors in outlets, pull boxes and similar locations where conductors are accessible. 26 05 01 - 7 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 01 K. Conductors in panels, cabinets, enclosures: Provide neat and workmanlike installation with conductors tied with T&B Ty -Rap, or equal, nylon wire ties. Provide adhesive back nylon Ty - Rap 4-way bases (#TC200X200AX or equal) to group conductors in neat and orderly manner. L Low voltage wiring and cables specified herein by Divisions 26, 27, or 28 shall be installed either in complete raceway system or shall be plenum rated. 3.4 BOXES A. Support boxes securely and independently. B. Mount boxes on building surfaces or support with trapeze hanger. C. Do not use junction boxes unless the number of bends, pulling length or circuit requirement necessitates their installation. D. Junction or pull box openings must be accessible. E. Do not use extension rings to provide Code size space within a new junction box. Provide larger junction boxes as required in lieu of extension rings. F. Do not intermix raceways and wiring at common junction boxes except at terminal equipment connections. 3.5 WIRING DEVICES A. Installation: Install two or more wiring devices shown in one location under a common plate. Install plates with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces. Do not install more than one device in single gang position. B. Device Locations: Device or equipment mounting height given herein the Specifications, Contract Drawing, and/or documents are intended to provide general guidelines. Provide pre rough -in coordination and verification with other divisions. Verify that the intended mounting heights are :appropriate for the intended device use, and the device location is not in conflict with other components. C. Prior to rough -in, devices and equipment locations may be revised by the Owner's Representative within 20' of the designed contract location, at no cost. Prior to rough -in, confirm locations with Owner for devices they may wish to have relocated from the location indicated on the contract drawings. D. If the contractor fails to provide such coordination and field verification and results of erroneous installation, the contractor shall remedy such installation per Owner's Representative's direction, at contractors cost. E. Provide GFCI protection for receptacles requiring GFCI protection per NEC. F. Mount wiring devices above finished floor to centerline of device as follows, unless otherwise noted or as directed by Owner's Representative. Coordinate with Owner's Representative for possible interference with decorative features, art displays, etc. 26 05 01 - 8 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 Switches 43" (ADA conditions: 32 — 36") Receptacles, Telecom 18" Receptacles Above Counter 8" to CL. Above backsplash or as directed Receptacles (In Classified Areas) 24" (above finished floor and below ceiling) Fire Alarm Pull Station, Wall Phones 43" Fire Alarm Audio Visual Device 80" (or 6" below ceiling), whichever is lower Panelboard 72" to top 3.6 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. General: Provide disconnects at all motors and other equipment items unless the equipment has a self-contained, Code approved disconnecting method. B. Mounting: Coordinate mounting location with the Equipment Installer. In general, mounting height shall be 6'-6" maximum to top of switch. Provide weatherproof enclosures for all exterior locations. 3.7 GROUNDING A. General: Provide system and equipment grounding in accordance with the applicable codes and ordinances and as further amplified on the Plans. B. Ground service equipment, separately derived systems, conduits, devices and equipment in accordance with NEC, article 250. C. Grounding Conductor: Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in conduits containing wiring systems above 50 volts. Insulation and conductor type shall be the same for circuit or feeder conductors. Size conductors in accordance with NEC article 250. D. Bonding: Conduit systems shall be effectively grounded and bonded together by approved bonding means in accordance with the NEC. Verify ground continuity between conduits, boxes, receptacles, and equipment. 3.8 NAMEPLATES/LABELS/PROGRAMMING A. Equipment Identification: Provide nameplates for electrical equipment identification. A partial list includes, but is not limited to the following: All controls, wall switch for fans, disconnect switches, switchboard devices, transformers, lighting control center (LCC), all panel boards, and all cabinets. Remove temporary markings, and the like from devices when installing nameplates. Nameplates shall be engraved phenolic, white letters on black background, letter height 1/4" unless a lack of space requires smaller nameplate. Minimum overall height 1/2", length as required. Install with screws or rivets; adhesive is NOT approved. B. Nameplates/Labels/Programming: All work required in this contract that includes a room number or similar identification system must utilize the Owner's room numbering as specified by the Architect. 26 05 01 9 Aft, Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms BASIC MATER1ALS AND METHODS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 05 01 C. Provide nameplates as specified in on all major equipment with name of equipment, serving panel, circuit number, full load ampere rating, horse power rating, starter size, disconnect size, and fuse size as applicable or otherwise approved by engineer. D. Provide Etched and filled stainless cover plates for all branch circuit wiring devices and lighting conirols. Indicate branch panel and circuit. Example: (Pnl 2LA-12) Lettering shall be no less than 1/8" high and be color as specified. All labeling shall be done after the final load balancing work is complete to provide as -built numbering. Submit sample of finished product to Engineer prior to final fabrication. Color shall be black filled lettering except optional standby circuits shall be red. E. J-boxes shall be labeled with permanent marker. F. Outlets and switches shall be labeled with panel and circuit number(s); Brady 3/4-inch clear polyester tape with black letters; product #110901, B-430. END OF SECTION 26 05 01 26 05 01 - 10 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4628 S 144th St, Tukwila, WA 98168 A. Provide electrical power conductors and cables for systems 600-volts and less. This Section includes single conductor building wire, wire and cables for 600-volts and less, and wiring connectors and terminations. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 3 — Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2001 (R2007). B. ASTM B 8 — Standard Specification for Concentric -Lay -Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium -Hard, or Soft; 2004. C. ASTM 787/B 787M — Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (R2009). D. NECA 1 — Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractor's Association; 2006. E. NEMA WC 70 — Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009. (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S- 95-658). F. NETA STD ATS — Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2009. G. NFPA 70 —National Fire Protection Agency; National Electrical Code (NEC); Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including all Applicable Amendments and Supplements. H. UL 44 — Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. 1. UL 83 — Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. J. UL 486A-486B — Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. K. UL 486C — Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. 26 05 19 - 1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 L UL 486D — Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. M. UL 854 — Service -Entrance Cables; Current Edition, Including all Revisions. N. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). 1.5 WIRING METHODS A. Wiring systems 50V and greater shall be installed in a complete raceway system. B. Wiring systems less than 50V: Unless noted otherwise in other sections of these documents, may be installed as open wiring concealed above accessible suspended ceilings and other accessible spaces, subject to the following conditions: 1. Install wiring in conduit where routed in walls, exposed, above non -accessible ceilings, in non -accessible spaces, and outdoors. 2. Open wiring shall be plenum -rated. 3. Provide conduit sleeves where wires penetrate walls. 4. Provide outlet boxes for low -voltage wiring devices and splices. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Provide complete submittal information. Approved documents shall include, but not be limited to, factory shop drawings, details, and wiring diagrams. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wire and Cable: 1. Southwire. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Okonite Company. 4. Or approved equal. B. Splice Connectors: 1. Burndy. 2. Ilsco. 3. 3-M. 4. Thomas & Betts. 5. Or approved equal. C. Terminal Lugs: 1. Burndy. 2. llsco. 3. Thomas & Betts. 4. Or approved equal. 2.2 WIRING REQUIREMENTS 26 05 19 - 2 Tukwila School. District �..' Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 A. Branch. Circuits: 1. Provide separate grounded conductor (neutral) for each branch circuit. Shared neutral not permitted for multiwire branch circuits. 2. Provide separate equipment grounding conductor for each branch circuit. Shared equipment grounding conductor not permitted for multiple branch circuits. B. lnterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THHN-THWN insulation in raceway. C. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THWN (THWN-2) insulation in listed exterior use raceway. D. Underground Installations: Use only building wire with Type THWN (THWN-2) insulation in listed underground use raceway. 2.3 CONDCUTORS AND CABLES A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose indicated. C. Provide new conductors and cables manufactured not more than one year prior to installation. D. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. E. Comply with NECA WC 70. F. Thennoplastic-Insulated Conductors: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. G. Thermoset -Insulated Conductors: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. H. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this Project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper conductors: Soft drawn, annealed, 98-percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B 3, ASTM B 8, or ASTM B 787/B 787M, unless otherwise indicated. I. Conductor Color Coding: 1. Color code conductors as indicated or otherwise required by Authority Having Jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout the Project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. 3. Color Code: Refer to Section 26 05 01 "Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical". 2.4 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B. Conductor Stranding: 260519-3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms *owl LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 1 Feeder and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. 2. Control Circuits: Stranded. C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 Volts. D. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire Type THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below: a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XIUW-2. b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2. c. Service Entrance Conductors: Type XI-I-NW-2. E. Conductor Material: Copper. F. Additional Requirements: 1. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN-2, 90-degrees C. 2. Minimum size conductor: #12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. 3. Minimum size conductor: #16 AWG for control circuits. 4. 120 V branch circuits longer than 75-feet: #10 AWG conductors for 20-ampere circuits. 5. 277 V branch circuits longer than 200-feet: #10 AWG conductors for 20-ampere circuits. 2.5 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable. B. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper Conductors Size #8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist -on insulated spring connectors. 2. Copper Conductors Size #6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors. C. Twist -On Insulated Spring Connectors: 1. Standard Applications: Rated 600 V, 221-degrees F. 2. High Temperature Applications: Rated 600 V, 302-degrees F. 3. Pre -filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. 4. Do not use push -in wire connectors as a substitute for twist -on insulated spring connectors. D. Mechanicai Connectors: Provide bolted type or set -screw type. E. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. PART 3 - EXECUTJON 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage wires and cables has been completed. 26 05 19 - 4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 B. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. D. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner. E. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the AHJ. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. F. Install conductors with a minimum of 6-inches of slack at each outlet. G. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. H. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors: 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces. 5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 26 05 19 - 5 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. 1. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. J. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape. K. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 01. Identify each conductor with the panelboard and circuit number or other designation indicated. L. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungrounded conductors at each piece of feeder or branch -circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods required per Codes. N. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. O. Open cables shall be installed in a neat and workmanship like manner, parallel or perpendicular to building lines and supported at intervals not greater than 5'. P. Rome wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. Use wiring methods required and pull all conductors into raceway at same time. Q. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire #4 AWG and larger. R. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. S. Make splices, taps, and teiminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. T. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, #8 AWG and smaller. U. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, #10 AWG and smaller. V. Use Vinyl Mastic Pads and Rolls for splices in wet locations. W. Branch Circuit Installation: 1. Contamous color code insulation throughout. 2. Make no splices in wiring from distribution equipment to first outlet. 3. Do not inter mix wiring from separate electrical systems unless specifically indicated. X. Feeder Installation: 1. Size feeders as shown on Drawings. 26 05 19 - 6 Tukwila School District C Showalter Middle School. Temporary Portable Classrooms LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 2. Identify according to color code standards. 3. Make no splices unless shown on the Drawings or specifically approved by the Owner's representative. 4. Splices shall be compression sleeve type. 3.4 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. General: The electrical installation shall be inspected and tested to ensure conformity to Code, authorities having jurisdiction, and contract documents. Field tests shall be performed in conformance with the National Electrical Testing Association (NETA) Standards. Tests shall be performed by an authorized testing agency that is independent from the installing electrical contractor. B. Measure and record insulation resistance of all wiring installed by or altered by the contractor including insulation resistance of all equipment. The Electrical Contractor shall not be responsible for defective insulation in equipment that is existing or has been supplied by other divisions of the specifications, unless such damage is due to negligence or incorrect handling or installation workmanship of this Contractor. I. The insulation resistance of each circuit phase -to -phase and phase -to -ground shall be measured. For circuits rated less than 600 volts, the resistance shall not be less than one megohm. 2. Systems rated above 240 volts shall be tested with a 1000-volt Megohmeter. Circuits rated 240 volts and below shall be tested with a 500-volt Megohmeter. The D.C. potential shall be applied for thirty (30) seconds. C. The Contractor shall record test readings and submit certified test reports in the record operation and maintenance manuals for SPU records. Any equipment or cable to fail the above tests shall be repaired or replaced as required to pass the above testing criteria. END OF SECTION 26 05 19 260519-7 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 05 19 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 26 05 19 - 8 Tukwila School District C Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Showalter Middle School 4628 S 144th St, Tukwila, WA 98168 SCOPE Provide a complete grounding system that complies with the current edition of the National. Electrical Code (NEC), and all applicable regulatory codes. B. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of: 1. Metal frame of buildings. 2. Rode electrodes. 3. Ground Bars. 4. Additional grounding and bonding components required. C, Performance Requirements: Maximum 10-ohms grounding system resistance. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC); National Fire Protection Association, most recent edition adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2,1 MANUFACTURERS Grounding Equipment & Connectors: 1. Cooper Power Systems. 2. Storm Copper Components Co. 3. Or approved equal. 2.2 GROUND RODS A. Minimum size: 3/4-inch diameter by 10-feet long, solid copper rods. 260526-1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School GROUNDING AND BONDING Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 26 2.3 GROUND BARS A. Copper bar with pre -punched holes. B. UL recognized standoff insulators for wall -mounting. C. Stainless steel mounting brackets, stainless steel assembly bolts and lock washers. D. Suitable for indoor and outdoor installations. E. Size as required. 2.4 GROUND CONDUCTORS A. Grounding conductors shall be soft drawn, bare, stranded copper unless otherwise noted. Size conductors per Drawings and NEC, Article 250. 1. Grounding Electrode Conductors for AC Systems: a. See NEC table 250.66. 2. Equipment Grounding Conductors: a. See NEC table 250.122. b. Equipment grounding conductors may be insulated; provide green insulation and/or approved permanent identification for conductors larger than #6 AWG. 2.5 GROUND ELECTRODE CONDUCTORS A. Connectors for grounding electrode conductor to ground rods shall be of the thermal fusion type; conductor -to -conductor connections may be either thermal fusion or approved hydraulically applied compression type. 2.6 GROUNDING BUSHINGS A. Grounding bushings shall be matched to the ampacity of the grounding conductor and shall have approved set -screw type grounding lug connectors. 2.7 GROUNDING CONNECTORS A. Shall meet the requirements of ground bushings, cast, set -screw or bolted type. B. Clamps shall be matched to the ampacity of the grounding conductor. Provide approved raceway hub where grounding conductor is shown protected by conduit or armored cable. Clamps shall be U-bolt type for connection to water pipes. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving ground rods. 26 05 26 - 2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms '„hp GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 C. Prior to making mechanical or thermal connections, all conductors shall be clean, dry and bright with the bonding surface thoroughly cleaned of any oxides, mill, scale or other foreign matter. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide system and equipment grounding in accordance with the applicable codes and ordinances and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Ground service equipment, separately derived systems, conduits, devices and equipment in accordance with NEC, Article 250. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide green insulated equipment grounding conductor in conduits containing wiring systems above 50 V. Insulation and conductor type shall be the same as circuit or feeder conductors. Size conductors in accordance with NEC, Article 250. D. Inspection: Place no backfill around made electrode earth grounding systems until the installation is inspected and approved by the Owner's Representative and the Electrical Inspector. E. Bonding: Conduit systems shall be effectively grounded and bonded together by approved bonding means in accordance with the NEC. Verify ground continuity between conduits, boxes, receptacles, cable trays and equipment. F. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated on Drawings or required by the NEC: 1. Unless otherwise indicated, top of electrode shall be 6-inches below finished surface. 2. Bury electrode conductors below finished surface. G. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing. Bond steel together. H. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Section 1 of this Specification. 3.3 GROUND CONTINUITY A. Maintain ground continuity throughout the entire electrical system. B. Permanently connect the electrical system neutral to the water service. The system shall be grounded only at transformer secondaries and at the main switchboard. Branch panelboard neturals must be isolated from additional points of grounding. C. Provide approved bushings or locknuts on all conduits terminating in panelboards, pullboxes, or other enclosures to ensure continuity of conduit grounding connections. D. Securely ground lighting fixtures via the conduit system or by a separate suitable grounding conductor where flexible conduit is used. E. Provide a separate grounding conductor in all non-metallic conduits and in all flexible metallic conduit runs. Connect to the grounding system in an approved manner and so as to comply with codes. 26 05 26 - 3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms GROUNDING AND BONDING 26 05 26 F. Cable trays used as equipment grounding conductors shall be specifically approved for that purpose. Special bolted mechanical connectors and/or bonding jumpers shall be utilized to ensure system ground continuity. G. All plug-in receptacles shall be bonded to the box and raceway ground system unless specific isolated ground connections are shown on the Drawings. 3.4 GROUNDING CONNECTIONS A. All grounding connections shall be carefully made to ensure low system impedance. Locate grounding connections to allow future servicing and expansion. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Ground conductors shall be protected from mechanical injury during construction. Provide protective coverings or rigid non-ferrous conduit. 3.6 GROUND RODS A. Ground rods shall be driven into undisturbed soil to full depth. Provide additional rods, ionic salt solutions and the like where special low -resistant grounds are specified or to comply with maximum system resistance requirements. 3.7 THROUGH -SLAB GROUND PENETRATIONS A. Ground conductors extending through the slab shall be protected by a rigid conduit sleeve. The void portion of the sleeve shall be packed with non -hardening type duct seal. 3.8 HIGH VOLTAGE CABLE GROUNDING A. Metallic shielding components, such as tapes, wires or braids, and their associated conducting or semi -conducting components shall be grounded per NEC, Article 250. Ground terminations shall be made according to the manufacturer's written specifications. 3.9 TESTING A. Shall conform to Section 26 08 00 "Commissioning of Electrical". END OF SECTION 26 05 26 26 05 26 - 4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 29 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4628 S 144th St, Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide conduit and equipment supports, anchors, and fasteners. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NECA 1 — Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Contractors Association; 2006. B. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC); National Fire Protection Association; most recent edition adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements. C. ICC — International Code Council. 1.5 QUAILTY ASSURANCE A. All concrete fasteners shall be ICC listed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas & Betts Coporation. 2. Threaded Rod Company. 3. Kildorf. 4. Or approved equal. 2,2 MATERIALS A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized or stainless steel. 26 05 29 - 1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms NGERS AND SUPPORTS 26 05 29 C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Do not use powder -actuated anchors. 2. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast inserts, expansion anchors, or preset inserts. 3. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, steel spring clips, or welded fasteners. 4. Concrete Surfaces: Use expansion anchors. 5. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners. 6. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors or preset inserts. 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 8. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Obtain permission from Owner's Representative before drilling or cutting structural members. 3 Install in accordance with ICC report from manufacturer. B. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon -head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. C. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four (4) anchors. D. In wet and damp locations, use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1-inch off wall. E. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. F. Surface mounted conduit and boxes are allowed only where CMU or Concrete walls are present. All other areas of building are to have conduit and boxes recessed in walls. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 26 05 29 - 2 Tukwila School District Ca) Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 — GENERAL RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4628 S 144th St, Tukwila, WA 98168 1 .3 SCOPE A. Provide outlets and pull boxes as required to enclose devices, permit pulling conductors and for wire splices and branches. All outlets shall be code sized junction boxes with matching cover plate for each system used. B. Provide conduit, tubing, wireways, outlets and pull boxes as required to permit pulling conductors and for wire splices and branches. All outlets shall be code sized junction boxes with matching cover plate for each system used. C. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. D. Connections to equipment using flexible conduit and wire connections. E. Wet and Damp Locations above grade: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. F. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pullboxes. G. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or surface metallic raceway. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pullboxes. H. Floor boxes and poke-thru devices shall provide interface between power, communication and A/V cabling in a concrete floor, and at the workstations where power, communications and A/V device outlets are required. The boxes shall provide recessed device outlets that will not obstruct the floor area. 26 05 33 - 1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 1.4 REFERENCES CEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 A. ANSI C80.1 (American National Standards Institute) — Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 (American National Standards Institute) — Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI C80.6 (American National Standards Institute) — Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit. D. NEMA FB I (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. E. NEMA OS 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports. F. NEMA OS 3 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — Selection and Installation Guidelines for Electrical Outlet Boxes. G. NEMA WD 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) General Purpose Wiring Devices. H. NEMA WD 6 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) Wiring Devices — Dimensional Requirements. 1. NEMA 250 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) — Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). J. UL 1 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Flexible Metal Conduit. K. UL 6 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel. L. UL 360 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. M. UL 514A (Underwriters Laboratories) — Metallic Outlet Boxes. N. UL 514B (Underwriters Laboratories) — Conduit, Tubing and Cable Fittings. O. UL 514C (Underwriters Laboratories) — Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Flush -Device Boxes, and Covers, P. UL 797 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Electrical Metallic Tubing — Steel. Q. UL 870 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Wireways, Auxilliary Gutters and Associated Fittings. R. UL 1242 (Underwriters Laboratories) — Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit - Steel. 1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory 26 05 33 - 2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system. B. Connections to equipment using flexible conduit and wire connections. C. Wet and Damp Locations above grade: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. D. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pullboxes. E. Exposed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel and aluminum conduit, intermediate metal conduit, electrical metallic tubing, or surface metallic raceway. Provide sheet -metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pullboxes. F. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch, 3/4-inch for homeruns, unless otherwise specified. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog cuts for all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. B. Product Data: I. Flexible metal conduit. 2. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Raceway fittings. 4. Conduit bodies. 5. Wireway. 6. Pull and junction boxes. 7. Electrical floor boxes. 8. Poke-thru devices. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual routing of conduits of 1-1/2 inch trade size and larger. 2. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes. 3. Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment connections. 4. Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of floor boxes and poke-thru devices. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturers regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical floor boxes, poke-thru devices, and fittings of the types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years. Provide electrical floor boxes, poke-thru devices, and fittings produced by a manufacturer listed in this Section or in the Drawings. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of floor box or poke-thru device through one (1) source from a single manufacturer. 26 05 33 - 3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 C. Electrical Boxes and Fittings: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, NEC, UL, ETL, and NEMA Standards pertaining to boxes and fittings. D. Floor boxes and poke-thru devices shall be approved by local codes. Floor boxes and poke-thru devices shall be UL listed to their Standards UL 5 I 4A and UL 514C. Floor boxes and poke- thru devices shall conform to the standards set in the National Electrical Code. Floor boxes shall also have been evaluated by UL to meet the applicable U.S. safety standards for scrub water exclusion when used on tile, terrazzo, wood, and carpet covered floors. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. B. Deliver floor boxes and poke-thru devices in factory labeled packages. C. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations. D. Protect from damage due to weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations. 1 .10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment connected under other Sections. B. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. C. Coordinate floor boxes and poke-thru devices with existing conditions and new space layouts. D. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other Sections. E. Determine connection locations and requirements. F. Sequence rough -in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment. G. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR WIRING A. General: Outlet and pull boxes shall be pressed steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where applicable. Large pull boxes shall be fabricated sheet steel; zinc coated or baked enamel finish, with return flange and screw retained cover. B. Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same manufacturer and to match raceway. Boxes to accommodate standard devices and device plates. 26 05 33 - 4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 C. Concrete and Masonry: Boxes for casting in concrete or mounting in masonry walls shall be the type specifically designed for that purpose. D. General Purpose Electrical Outlet: Provide, as required for work and installation, 4" square flush junction box, 2-1/8" deep, with finished cover plates to match device type used or as noted. Provide additional depth box or extension rings and/or mud rings as required to provide a flush installation. E. Telecommunications Outlet: Provide RANDL 5 series #T-55017 box for telecommunications and voice outlets. Provide rnudrings as specified. 2.2 EXTERIOR WIRING A. Outlet and junction boxes shall be cast or malleable iron or shall be cast of corrosion resistant alloy compatible with raceway to which it is connected. Pull boxes shall be fabricated of heavy gauge steel and hot dipped galvanized. All boxes shall have gasketed covers. 2.3 RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242, zinc -coated steel. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; threaded, all steel fittings. 2.4 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Product Description: UL 1, interlocked steel construction. B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.5 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Product Description: UL 360, interlocked steel or aluminum construction with PVC jacket. B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B, cadmium- or zinc -plated. 2.6 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Product Description: ANSI C80.3 and UL 797; galvanized tubing. B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1. 1. Steel. 2. Compression Type. 3. Insulated throat. 4. Listed as rainproof. 2.7 METALLIC CONDUIT BODIES A. Product Description: UL 514B. 26 05 33 - 5 /a• Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 2.8 W1REWAY A. Manufacturers: I. Hoffrnan. 2. Square D. 3. Or approved equal. Az- \ •-• RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 B. Product Description: UL 870; General purpose type wireway. 1. NEMA 250, Type 1. 2. Knockouts: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Size: Per codes. 4. Cover: Screw cover. 5. Fittings: Lay -in type with removable top, bottom, and sides; captive screws. 6. Finish: Rust inhibiting primer coating with gray enamel finish. 2.9 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2-inch male fixture studs where required. B. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in 26 05 01. C. Wall Plates for Unfinished Areas: Furnish gasketed cover. 2.10 VOICE AND DATA OUTLET BOXES A. Minimum Size: 5-inches square, 2-7/8 inches deep. Depth does not include plaster or extension rings. B. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. C. Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 2. 2.11 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 2.12 FLOOR BOXES A. Manufacturers: 1. Legrand/Wiremold, Models RFB11-0G and RFB9-OG. 2. Or approved equal. 2.13 POKE-THRU DEVICES A. Manufacturers: 1. Legrand/Wiremold, Model 8ATCP-BK. 2. Or approved equal. B. Project Specific, each poke-thru shall contain the following: 26 05 33 - 6 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 1. (2) 20-amp duplex power receptacles. 2. (4) dedicated power circuits, (1) for each outlet. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 C. Materials: 1. 8AT Poke-Thru Assembly: shall consist of an insert and activation cover. Overall poke- thru assembly shall be 16-3/4" in length. 2. Insert: the insert body shall recess the devices a minimum of 2-3/4" and have a polyester based backing enamel finished interior (black). There shall be necessary channels to provide complete separation of services. The body will consist of an intumescent fire stop material to maintain the fire rating of the floor slab. The intumescent material will be held securely in place in the insert body and shall not have to be adjusted to maintain fire rating of the unit and the floor slab. The insert shall have retaining feature that will hold the poke-thru device in the floor slab without additional fasteners. The poke-thru insert shall also consist of a 3/4" trade size conduit stub that is connected to the insert body and a 24.5 cu. in. [402m1] stamped steel junction box for wire splices and connections. The stamped steel junction box shall also contain the necessary means to electrically ground the poke-thru device to the system ground. 3. Activation Cover: the activation covers shall be manufactured of die-cast aluminum alloy and be available in powder -coated gray, black, or plated in brass, nickel or bronze finish. Two gaskets (one for carpet and one for tile) are provided to go under the trim flange to maintain scrub water tightness. The activation cover shall be 9-1/4" in diameter. The activation covers shall be available in carpet and tile versions. The carpet covers shall be surface mounted and the tile covers shall be flush with the finished floor covering. The cover shall have spring loaded slides to allow cables to egress out of the unit and maintain as small an egress opening as possible. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized. B. Verify outlet locations, routing, and termination locations of raceway prior to rough -in. 3.2 EXISTING WORK A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. B. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source. C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed. D. Remove exposed abandoned equipment wiring connections, including abandoned connections above accessible ceiling finishes. E. Disconnect abandoned equipment and remove wiring connections. Remove abandoned components when connected raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes and enclosures not removed. 26 05 33 - 7 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms lb\ RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 F. Extend existing equipment connections using materials and methods as specified. G. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel. Mark and protect all raceway not designated for modification or demolition. Replace any raceway not designated for modification or demolition that becomes damaged during the project. H. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods specified. Where none are specified, match existing equipment size/type being extended. 1. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install raceway and boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". B. Equipment Connections: 1. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. 2. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. 3. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. 4. Install cord and cap for field -supplied attachment plug. 5. Install suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. 6. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. 7. Install telminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. 8. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. C. Penetrate firewalls and fire -rated floors with rigid galvanized steel conduit. Extend a minimum of six inches beyond the firewall. Provide firestopping ground and bond raceway and boxes. D. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes. E. Identify raceway and boxes per Section 26 05 01. F. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. 3.4 INSTALLATION — RACEWAY A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system. B. Arrange raceway supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. 26 05 33 - 8 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 D. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack attached to structure. Construct rack using steel channel; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways. E. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. F. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. G. Install IMC and EMT for general wiring. Flexible conduit may be used only for installation within existing walls. H. Install flexible conduit for connection to motors, transformers and vibrating equipment, with enough length to provide at least a ninety degree bend in the flexible conduit. Use liquid -tight metallic conduit in wet, damp or exterior locations. 1. Construct wireway supports from steel channel. J. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes. M. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. O. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. P. Install conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes. Q. install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between conduit bodies and boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one- shot bender to fabricate or install factory elbows for bends in metal conduit 2 inch trade size and larger. R. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic, control and expansion joints. S. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples. T. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. U. Close ends and unused openings in wireway. 3.5 INSTALLATION — BOXES A. Install boxes used for equipment and luminaire attachment directly to structure or to supports provided under Section 260501 "Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical Systems". Do not use supports for non -electrical equipinent or systems for electrical system attachment. 26 05 33 9 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms CE AYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 B. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section for outlet device. Use 4-inch square boxes for receptacles. C. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough -in to accommodate intended purpose. D. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring device orientation. E. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. F. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. G. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. H. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation in non -acoustical rated walls. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. J. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. L. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems. N. Support boxes independently of conduit. O. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. P. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. Q. Install a minimum of one 1 inch conduit for every four data and voice outlets. 3.6 INSTALLATION — FLOOR BOXES A. The minimum concrete pour depth shall be 4-1/8" (RFB9) or 6-1/8" (RFBI I). The floor box shall contain four leveling legs to provide full pre -concrete pour adjustment. B. The box shall ship with a disposable cover to prevent the entry of debris during the construction phase. Alternate disposable covers to provide terrazzo pour stops is to be available from the manufacturer. 3.7 INSTALLATION — POKE-THRU DEVICES A. Unit shall permit all wiring to be completed at floor level. The 8AT units shall mount in an 8- inch cored hole, actual 8-1/16 inch core hole. Use is defined by the UL Fire Resistance 26 05 33 - 10 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 Directory as a minimum spacing of 2-feet on center and not more than one device per 65 square -feet of floor area in each span. B. Installation shall be completed by pushing unit down into the cored hole. Prior to and during installation, refer to system layout and/or approved drawings. Installer shall comply with detailed manufacturer's instruction sheet included with each device. The unit shall contain a retainer for securing the device in the slab, as well as the necessary intumescent material to seal the cored hole under fire conditions. 3.8 INTERFERENCE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods in accordance with Section 260501 "Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical Systems". B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings. D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. 3.9 ANCHORING A. All boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joints. Boxes must be so attached that they will not "rock" or "shift" when devices are operated. 3.10 FLUSH MOUNTING A. Unless approved by Architect, all electrical outlet boxes installed in finished areas shall be flush mounted. Provide cutting and patching as required. B. Except for approved surface mounted boxes or boxes above accessible ceilings, all boxes shall have front edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling. C. Al! materials, installations, and work within the ceiling shall comply with Code with regard to plenum space requirements. D. Flush mounted boxes on opposite sides of a common wall shall not be mounted back-to-back. Provide 6" minimum horizontal separation between closest edges of the boxes. Provide 24" minimum horizontal separation between outlet boxes on fire rated walls. 3.11 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS A. General: Coordinate the work of this Section with the work of other Sections and trades. Study all drawings that form a part of this contract and confer with the various trades involved to eliminate conflicts between the work of this Section and the work of other trades. Check and verify outlet locations indicated on Architectural drawings, door swings, installation details and layouts of suspended ceiling and locations of all plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment. 26 05 33 - 11 Tukwila School District „ Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 B. Centered on Built -In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recessed or similar features such as between a doorjamb and a cabinet, make these outlet locations exact. Relocate any outlets, which are located off center. C. Vertical And Horizontal Relationships: Where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be at the same elevation or one above the other, align them exactly on centerlines horizontally or vertically. Relocate all such outlets which are not so installed, at no additional cost to Owner. D. Ceiling Location: For acoustical material, locate outlet either at the corner joint or in the center of a panel, whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the same room in same panel position. 3.12 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. In ceilings of Acoustical Material: Locate in accordance with approved ceiling layout plans and so that fixtures replace full size ceiling tiles where possible. 3.13 CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT A. Provide complete connection to equipment in operable conditions. Provide outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve equipment. Outlet box required if equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space to accommodate circuit wiring or requires a wire with insulation rating different from circuit wiring used. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination, and connection per codes. 3.14 BLANK COVERS A. Provide blank covers or device cover plates on all boxes. 3.15 JUNCTION OR PULL BOXES A. Pull and junction boxes shall be provided as necessary to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit the number of bends within code requirements. Boxes shall be permanently accessible and shall be placed only at locations approved by the Engineer. B. In suspended ceiling spaces shall be supported from structure independently from ceiling suspension system. C. The drawings do not necessarily show every pull or junction box required. The Contractor shall add and provide all boxes as required per code. 3.16 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes. C. Coordinate with equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and configurations. 26 05 33 - 12 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 01111IN RACEWAYS AND BOXES 26 05 33 3.17 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other foreign materials. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore final finish. C. Repeat above process as satisfactory to Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 26 05 33 26 05 33 - 13 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms UNDERGROUND ELECT THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK AL CONSTRUCTION 26 05 41 26 05 41 - 12 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 41 3.11 TESTING AND CLEANING A. Verify that vaults and handholes are essentially dry. In the case where the presence of water will prevent the continuation of work, pump the vault or handhole dry and seal obvious leak points with epoxy grout or polyurethane -based water sealant. For plugging conduits use a plug capable of 15 psi hydrostatic pressure. Coordinate pumping discharge with the Engineer and obtain the approval from the Owner. B. Pull brush through full length of ducts. Use round bristle brush with a diameter 1/2-inch greater than internal diameter of duct. Clean internal surfaces of vaults and handholes, including sump. C. Duct Integrity: Swab out ducts with a mandrel 1/4-inch smaller in diameter than internal diameter of ducts. An Owner's Representative shall be present to witness all mandrel pulls. D. Grounding: Test vault grounding to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections in accordance with Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding". Measure ground resistance at each ground rod and report in final test results per Section 260800 "Electrical Acceptance Testing". Use an instrument specifically designed for ground resistance measurements. E. Written certification by electrical contractor that all testing and cleaning has been tested and cleaned per specifications. Provide written certification that vaults are grounded and meet or exceed the requirements of this section. Provide written certification as to testing and testing results to Engineer, Commissioning Authority and included in 0 & M Manual. END OF SECTION 26 05 41 2605 41 - 11 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION 26 05 41 with lead wool or approved equal. A cast metal grille -type sump frame and cover shall be installed over the manhole sump. A cable pulling iron shall be installed in the wall opposite each duct line entrance. 3.7 MANHOLES, VAULTS AND HANDHOLES INSTALLATION A. Install as indicated on Drawings according to manufacturer's written instructions, ASTM C 891 and Divisions 03 and 31: 1. Install units plumb and level and with orientation and depth coordinated with arrangement of connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 2. Support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from the 1-inch sieve to the No. 4 sieve and compacted to the same density as the adjacent undisturbed earth. 3. Drainage: Where vaults have drain holes in the bottom, provide 2-feet minimum of gravel below the drain hole or provide a drain line to the nearest storm drain. B. Grounding: Install grounding as indicated on drawings and/or Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding". C. Hardware: Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and insulators, as required for installation and support of cable and conductors and as indicated on drawings: 1. Field Installed Bolting Anchors: Do not drill deeper and 3-7/8 inches for field -installed anchor bolts. Use a minimum of (2) anchors for each cable stanchion. D. Train cables neatly around corners and secure to walls or ceiling using cable clamps with expansion anchors. 3.8 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Warning tape shall be installed directly above the pipe or concrete for encased ducts, at a depth of 12-inches below finished grade unless otherwise shown. 3.9 PERMANENT MARKERS A. Where ducts (conduits) are stubbed below grade for future services, provide graystone Index PC 3.06 Surveyor's Monument located directly over end of stubbed duct with top at finished grade, with marking indicating system piping serves. 3.10 IDENITIFICATION A. Identify raceways, cables and equipment as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems", or as indicated on drawings. B. Provide warning and caution signs as required by the Authority Having specifications or as indicated on drawings. C. Label raceways entering concealed locations from exposed locations as to the concealed area. Jurisdiction, these the destination via 26 05 41 - 10 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION 26 05 41 H. Concrete Encased Non -Metallic Ducts: Support on plastic separators coordinated with duct size and required duct spacing, and install according to the following: 1. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts at 8-feet maximum , and secure separators to the earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may fonn conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 2. Concrete: Do not pour concrete until conduit installation has been approved by Owner Representative and WA State Lnl inspector. Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at the exterior surface of the envelope. Do not use power driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct bank application. Pour each ductbank between vaults or other terminations in one continuous operation. When more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18-inches into the concrete on both sides of the joint near the comers of the envelope. 3. Reinforcing: Reinforce ductbanks where they cross disturbed earth. 4. Forms: Use the walls of the trench to form the side walls of the duct bank where the soil is self-supporting and the concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 5. Minimum Clearances Between Ducts: 3-inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, 3-inches between ducts for like services, and 12-inches between power and communication/signal ducts, or as indicated on the drawings. 6. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 18-inches below finished grade in non -traffic areas and at least 24-inches below finished grade in vehicular traffic areas. Stub -Ups: Use rigid steel conduit for stub -ups through concrete to equipment. Install insulated grounding bushings at the conduit terminations. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete pads, extend steel conduit a minimum of 4-inches beyond the edge of the pad. Couple steel conduits to the ducts with adapters designed for the purpose and then encase the coupling with 3-inches of concrete. J. Sealing Provide temporary closure at all duct terminations in vaults installed in this Project. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand a minimum of 15 psi hydrostatic pressure. K. Pulling Wire: Install 100-pound test nylon cord in installed ducts, including spares, or pull rope as indicated on the drawings. 3.6 MANHOLES A. Manholes shall be constructed approximately where shown. The exact location of each manhole shall be determined after careful consideration has been given to the location of other utilities, grading, and paving. The location of each manhole shall be approved by the Architect. Manholes shall be the type noted on the drawings and shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable details as indicated. The top of manhole covers shall be flush with the finished surface of the paving or as noted on drawings. In unpaved areas, the top of manhole covers shall be approximately 'A inch above the finished grade. Where existing grades that are higher than finished grades are encountered, a sufficient number of courses of brick shall be installed between the top of manhole and manhole frame to elevate temporarily the manhole cover to existing grade level. Where duct lines enter manholes, the sections of duct may be either cast in the concrete or may enter the manhole through a square or rectangular opening of suitable dimensions provided in the manhole walls. Where openings are provided for the entrance of duct lines, the space between ducts and between ducts and manhole walls shall be calked tight 26 05 41 - 9 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms UNDERGROUND ELECT CAL CONSTRUCTION 26 05 41 2. Underground Direct Burial: For low voltage applications only where identified on Contract Drawings. Use in Reinforced, Concrete Encased Ductbmks: Use Schedule 80 Rigid Plastic Conduit as standard (except rigid steel under roadways). Use rigid steel on bends 45 degree or greater. Use of Schedule 40 Rigid PVC Conduit under non -traffic areas is acceptable. 3. All underground conduit shall be a minimum of 2-inch standard trade size, except as permissible to use 1-inch for exterior lighting, control, etc. as shown in Drawings. 4. Use PVC fittings for PVC conduit and suitable watertight connections wherc PVC conduit connects to galvanized steel conduit. 5. Galvanized rigid steel conduit installations underground or under concrete slab shall be factory coated with 3-mil bitumastic or protected with 3M Scotchrap pipe primer and Scotchrap 50 (10-mil) spirally applied half -lapped tape. 3.5 CONDUIT AND DUCT INSTALLATION A. Install conduit and ducts as indicated on drawings and according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Slope: Pitch ducts minimum of 4-inches per 100 feet to drain toward vaults and handholes and away from buildings and equipment or as indicated on the drawings. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between (2) vaults to drain in both directions. C. Curves and Bends: Use manufactured galvanized rigid steel elbows for stub -ups at equipment and at building entrances with a minimum radius of 36-inches. Use long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 25-feet both horizontally and vertically at other locations, not to exceed 20 degrees for field bends or as indicated on the drawings. D. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight according to manufacturer's instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in the same plane. E. Duct Entrances to Vaults and Handholes: Space end bells approximately 8-inches on center for 4-inch ducts and varied proportionately for other duct sizes. Change from regular spacing to end bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. Grout end bells into vault walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances. F. Building Entrances: Transition from underground duct to rigid steel conduit 5-feet minimum outside the building wall. Use fittings manufactured for the purpose. Follow appropriate installation instructions below. 1. Concrete Encased Ducts: Install reinforcing in ductbanks passing through disturbed earth near buildings and other excavations. Provide ductbank support at wall without reducing structural or watertight integrity of building wall. 2. Direct Buried, Non -encased Duct Entering Non -waterproofed Walls: Provide a Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe sleeve for each duct. Caulk space between the conduit and sleeve with duct sealing compound on both sides for moisture -tight seal. 3. Waterproofed Wall and Floor Entrances: Provide a watertight entrance sealing device with the sealing gland assembly on the inside. Anchor device into masonry construction with one or more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing to the device to make permanently watertight. Manufactured by OZ/Gedney or approved equal. G. Separation Between Direct Buried, Non -Encased Ducts: Provide 3-inches minimum separation for like services, and 12 inches minimum between power and communication/signal ducts. 26 05 41 - 8 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms C. Material: 1. Gravel: 3/8-inch maximum. 2. Slump: 4-inch maximum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION UNDERGROUNELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION 26 05 41 A. Examine site to receive ducts and vaults for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the underground ducts and vaults. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and installations have been inspected by WA State Labor & Industries (Ln1) inspectors. B. Existing Utilities: Locate all existing utilities in the area prior to performing any trenching or excavation work. Coordinate with Civil. 3.2 EARTHWORK A. Comply with Division 31, Earthwork. B. Trenching: 1. Comply with OSHA/WISHA safety standards for trenching, including stable slope and shoring requirements. 2. Depth: Refer to drawings for trench depth requirements. Correct points of over - excavation using mechanically compacted backfill to form a smooth trench bottom. 3. Width: Excavate to minimum width consistent with stability of sides. 4. Slope: Slope trenches so that conduit and ducts drain toward vaults and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. 5. Muck Excavation: Where muck or unstable material is encountered, over excavate and backfill to attain proper grade with coarse sand, gravel, or Controlled Density Fill. 6. Pile backfill material in an orderly manner; a sufficient distance from the trench to avoid overloading trench banks. 7. Bedding: The entire bottom of the excavation is to be firm, stable, and at uniform density. C. Excavating for Handholes and Vaults: Provide 12-inch minimum clearance between outer surfaces of unit and embankment or timber used for shoring. 3.3 BACKFILLENG A. See Division 31, Section "Earthwork". 3.4 RACEWAY APPLICATIONS A. Refer to Specifications and Drawings for raceway materials. B. Metallic Conduit: Only use as specified in Division 26, Section "Raceways and Boxes". C. Non -Metallic Conduit: Use underground only: 1. Underground in Reinforced, Concrete Encased Ductbanks: Use Schedule 80 Rigid Plastic Conduit as standard (except rigid steel under roadways). Use rigid steel on bends 45 degree or greater. Use of Schedule 40 Rigid PVC Conduit under non -traffic areas is acceptable. 260541-7 Tukwila School. District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION 26 05 41 1. Gravel: 3/8-inch maximum. 2. Slump: 4-inch maximum. 3. Compressive Strength: 3,000 psi at 28-days. 4. Color: Dye ductbank concrete red. 5. Reinforcing (except when RMC is used): Steel conforming to ASTM A15. Provide No. 4 rebar top and bottom, 24-inch lap at splices (typical 4 places) and. No. 4 at 18-inches on center around perimeter with 3-inch minimum cover. Ductbank crossing below wall footings or within line of soil influence below the footing requires No. 4 rebar at 6-inches on center around perimeter. 2.10 BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Reinforced Concrete Ductbanks: Provide in accordance with Division 31 Section "Earthwork" in locations shown on Drawings: 1. Below Concrete Encasement: 6-inches minimum compacted 5/8-inch minus crushed rock. 2. Above Concrete Encasement: 3-inch minimum sand. 3. Upper Trench: a. Areas under Pavement: Controlled Density Fill: 1) Content : A mixture of Portland cement, fly ash, aggregates, water and admixtures proportioned to provide a non -segregating, self -consolidating and free flowing material which will result in a hardened, dense, non - settling and excavatable fill. Batch and mix in accordance with Division 03 to provide a flowing, non -segregating mix with a slump between 6-inch and 8-inch. b. Areas not under Pavement: Select Native Fill: 1) Unsaturated excavated earth free of rocks, broken concrete and debris 6-inch and larger, and compacted in 12-inch lifts to prevent settlement. c. Provide Underground Warning Tape 3-inches (76 mm) wide polyethylene tape, detectable type colored red with suitable warning label describing buried electrical lines, buried 12-inches below grade. B. Direct Burial Conduit: 1. Initial Bedding: 3-inches of sand below conduits. 2. Secondary Bedding: Unsaturated excavated earth free or rocks, broken concrete and debris 2-inches and larger, and compacted to 6-inch minimum above conduits. 3 Upper Trench: a. Areas under Pavement: Controlled Density Fill: 1) Content : A mixture of Portland cement, fly ash, aggregates, water and admixtures proportioned to provide a non -segregating, self -consolidating and free flowing material which will result in a hardened, dense, non - settling and excavatable fill. Batch and mix in accordance with Division 03 to provide a flowing, non -segregating mix with a slump between 6-inch and 8-inch. b. Areas not under Pavement: Select Native Fill: 1) Unsaturated excavated earth free of rocks, broken concrete and debris 6-inch and larger, and compacted in 12-inch lifts to prevent settlement. c. Provide Underground Warning Tape 3-inches (76 mm) wide polyethylene tape, detectable type colored red with suitable warning label describing buried electrical lines, buried 12-inches below grade. 260541-6 Tukwila School District `t.II•' Showalter Middle School UNDERGROUi\Th 'ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 41 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide 3-1/2 inch minimum duct spacings and concrete cover depths as indicated on the Drawings, while supporting ducts during concrete pour. B. Manhole/Vault Lifting Means: 1. Pullin.g Eyes in Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing bar fastening insert. 2-inch diameter eye, 1 inch by 4 inch bolt. Working load with 6 inch embedment in 4000 psi concrete: 13,000 pounds minimum tension. 2. Pullirig and Lifting Irons in Floor: 7/8-inch diameter, hot dipped galvanized, bent steel rod, stress relieved after forniing, and fastened to reinforced rod. Exposed triangular opening. Ultimate yield strength: 40,000 pounds shear and 60,000 pounds tension. C. Sump Frame and Grate: Comply with FS RR-F-621, Type-VII for frame and Type -I for cover. D. Bolting Inserts for Cable Racks: Flared, threaded inserts of non -corrosive, chemical resistant, non-conductive thermoplastic material 36-inches on center; I/2-inch internal diameter by 2-3/4 inches deep, flared to 1-1/4 inch minimum at base. Tested ultimate pull-out strength: 12,000 pounds minimum. E. Expansion Anchors for Installation after Concrete is Cast: Zinc plated carbon steel wedge type with stainless steel expander clip, 1/2-inch bolt size, 5300-pound rated pull-out strength, and 6800-pound rated shear strength minimum. F. Cable Racks: Non-metallic cable rack stanchion, 36-inch high X 4-inch wide, yellow Glass Reinforced Polymer, elongated mounting holes. G. Cable Arms: Non-metallic cable rack arms. Size and weight capacity in accordance with manufacturer's load rating. H. Cable Support Insulators: High glaze, wet process porcelain arranged for mounting on cable arms. 1. Ground Rods: Solid copper clad steel, 3/4-inch diameter by 10-feet length or as indicated on drawings. J. Ground Wire: Stranded bare copper, #4/0 AWG minimum or as indicated on the drawings. K. Duct Sealing Compound: Non -hardening, safe for human skin contact, not deleterious to cable insulation, workable at temperatures as low as 35 deg F withstands temperature of 300 deg F without slump, and adheres to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits, conduit coatings, concrete, masonry, lead, cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and the common metals. 2.9 DUCTBANK CONCRETE A. Ductbanks below roads, driveways, and anywhere where vehicles will travel shall be installed in concrete. Ductbanks entering buildings shall be installed in concrete within 10-feet of building. B. Material: 26 05 41 - 5 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms UNDERGROUND ELECTRIQAL CONSTRUCTION 26 05 41 F. Unions: Three piece threaded conduit unions where necessary. 2.4 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide 3-1/2 inch minimum duct spacing or as indicated on Drawings. 2.5 PULLBOXES A. Cast Metal Boxes: Cast aluminum, sized as indicated on drawings or per codes, with outside flanges and recessed, gasketed cover for flush mounting. Non-skid finish on cover with legend reading "ELECTRIC", COMMUNICATIONS or "SIGNAL" as appropriate. Provide traffic - rated, H20 minimum loading, in areas subject to vehicle traffic or access drives. 2.6 HANDHOLES A. General: Pre -cast concrete or structural plastic with the following standard features: 1. Cover with insert or other device to facilitate lifting. 2. Cover with locking devices similar to REA or FARGO. 3. Drain hole in base, 2 inch minimum diameter. 4. Knockouts in sides of adequate number and spacing to accommodate ductbank shown on Drawings. B. Exterior Lighting: Reinforced plastic mortar designed and tested to temperatures of —50 degrees F meeting ASTM D635-91 flammability test. C. Handhole Covers: Reinforced concrete, cast iron, or structural plastic, capable of supporting designed loads. Where located in roadways or traffic areas, covers shall be designed to support H20 minimum loading. Cast iron cover with cast -in -legend "ELECTRIC", "COMMUNICATIONS" or "SIGNAL" as appropriate. Machine cover -to -frame bearing surfaces. 2.7 MANHOLES AND VAULTS A. Pre -Cast Concrete Units: Interlocking, mating sections, complete with accessory items, hardware, and features as indicated on drawings. Include concrete knockout panels for conduit entrances and sleeves for ground rods. B. Covers: As indicated on drawings. Reinforced concrete or cast iron, capable of supporting designed loads. Where located in roadways or traffic areas, covers shall be designed to support H20 minimum loading. Cast iron cover with cast -in -legend "ELECTRIC", "COMMUNICATIONS" or "SIGNAL" as appropriate. Machine cover -to -frame bearing surfaces. C. Design structure according to ASTM C 858. D. Joint Sealant: Continuous extrusion of asphaltic butyl material with adhesion, cohesion, flexibility, and durability properties necessary to withstand the maximum hydrostatic pressures at the installation location with the ground water level at grade. E. Source Quality Control: Inspect structures according to ASTM C 1037. Units shall be capable of supporting designed loads, 26 05 41 - 4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms " **\ UNDERGROUDT6CTRICAL CONSTRUCTION 26 05 41 "Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring," and with Section 7 of the Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction as published by the Association General Contractors of America, Inc. B. Educate supervisors and employees on safety requirements and practices to be followed during the course of the work. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver ducts to site with ends capped. Store nonmetallic ducts with supports to prevent bending, warping, and deforming. B. Store pre -cast concrete units at site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. C. Lift and support pre -cast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFAC I URERS A. Manholes, Vaults and Handholes: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Utility Vault Company (OldCastle Precast). 2. Jensen Precast. 3. Hubbell Quazite. 4. Or other reviewed and approved Manufacturers. 2,2 CONDUIT AND DUCTS A. Metallic Conduit: Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RMC): ANSI C80.1. B. Non -Metallic Conduit: 1. Rigid PVC Conduit: NEMA TC 2, UL 651A, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC, sunlight resistant, rated for use with 90C conductors under all installation conditions and UL labeled for underground use, direct burial, or aboveground. 2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Steel Fittings: Zinc coated, cast malleable, ferrous metal, threaded fittings, with neoprene cover gasket on each fitting installed outdoors. B. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3. C. "Mogul Fittings": Provide "Mogul" size fittings for all conduit. D. Seal Bushings: Compound filled bushing on each conduit entering a building from outside underground and on each conduit passing from one space into another, which is normally at a lower temperature. E. Hubs: Appleton "Hub", "Hub-U" Series, Thomas & Betts "370" Series or approved equal hub on each conduit terminating in a box where a hub was not previously provided. 26 05 41 - 3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 41 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Submit catalog cuts for all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. C. Provide submittals which shall include the following: 1. Provide product data for accessories for vaults and handholes, conduit and duct, ductbank materials, and miscellaneous components. 2. Shop drawings showing details and design calculations for precast vaults and handholes, including reinforcing steel. 3. Certificate for concrete and steel used in underground precast concrete utility structures, according to ASTM C 858. 4. Inspection report for factory inspections, according to ASTM C 1037. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements ofNFPA 70. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories (UL) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. D. Conform to requirements of ANSI C2 "National Electrical Safety Code" for components and installation. 1.8 DEFINITIONS A. Duct: Electrical conduit and other raceway, either metallic or nonmetallic, used underground, embedded in earth or concrete. B. Ductbank: Two or more conduits or other raceway installed underground in the same trench or concrete envelope. C. Handhole: An underground junction box in a duct or duct bank. D. Vault: An underground utility structure, large enough for a person to enter, with facilities for installing, operating, and maintaining equipment and wiring. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, vaults, and handholes with final arrangement of other utilities as determined by field verification. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and ensure that duct runs drain to vaults and handholes. 1.10 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform work in accordance with the safety requirements of the Department of Labor Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Volume 36, Number 75, Part II, Subpart P, 260541-2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL lb\ UNDERGROUMJ ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION 26 05 41 A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Division 01, Division 26, Division 27 and Division 28. B. Review the Specifications and Drawings for coordination with additional requirements and information that apply to work under this Specification. .2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4628 S 144th St, Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the requirements for trenching, backfilling and installation of underground conduits, ducts, and ductbanks, and the design, fabrication, delivery and installation of pullboxes, handholes, vaults and manholes. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 03 "Concrete". B. Division 31 "Earthwork". C. Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding". D. Division 26 Section "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems". E. Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes". F. Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables". G. Division 26 Section "Medium -Voltage Cables". H. Division 27 Section "Basic Materials and Methods for Communication Systems". 1.5 REFERENCES A. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials). B. NFPA 70 (National Fire Protection Association) — National Electrical Code. C. ANSI. C2 "National Electrical Safety Code". 26 05 41 - 1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART - 1 GENERAL IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4628 S 144th St, Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for raceway and metal —clad cable. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Underground —line warning tape. 4. Warning labels and signs. 5. Instruction signs. 6. Equipment identification labels. 7. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. B. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. C. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in 26 05 53 - 1 Tukwila School. District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COLOR STANDARD A. Color for Printed Legend: 1. 208 Volt Power: White letters on a black field. 2. 277 Volt Power - White letters on blue 3. 208 Volt emergency Power: White letters on a dark orange field 4. 277 Volt Power - White letters on darker orange field 5. Fire Alarm: White on red. 6. Security/Access: White on yellow 7. Data: White on blue 8. AV: White on purple 9. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable. 2.2 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. B. Self —Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, laminated hard label with a clear, weather— and chemical — resistant coating. C. Snap —Around Labels for conduit: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color —coded acrylic sleeves, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. D. Snap —Around, Color —Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid —colored acrylic sleeves, 2 inches long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. E. Self —Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant;I, 2 inches wide;I, compounded for outdoor use. 26 05 53 - 2 Tukwila School District C Showalter Middle School IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 53 2.3 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION AND CONTROL —CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color —Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self—adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl —cloth, self—adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. C. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels: Cut from 0.014—inch— thick aluminum sheet, with stamped, embossed, or scribed legend, and fitted with tabs and matching slots for permanently securing around wire or cable jacket or around groups of conductors. D. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 2 by 2 by 0.05 inch, with stamped legend, punched for use with self—locking nylon tie fastener. E. Write —On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.015 inch thick, with corrosion —resistant grommet and polyester or nylon tie for attachment to conductor or cable. 1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag manufacturer. 2.4 UNDERGROUND —LINE WARNING TAPE A. Description: Pelmanent, bright —colored, continuous —printed, polyethylene tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct —burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend shall indicate type of underground line. 2.5 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. B. Self —Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory printed, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label, multicolor, pressure —sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment, unless otherwise indicated. Minimum size = 1/4". C. Baked —Enamel Warning Signs: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4—inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches. D. Metal —Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: Weather —resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose — acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396—inch galvanized —steel backing; , and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4—inch grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches. E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 26 05 53 - 3 ter" Tukwila School.District Showalter Middle School IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 53 1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER — ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD — EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." 2. Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING — OSHA REGULATION — AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES." 2.6 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. Self —Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with letters per above. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. B. Color shall be as follow: 1. 120/208 Normal - Black with white letters 2. 277/480 Normal - Blue with white letters 3. 120/208 Emergency - Dark Orange/Red with white letters 4. 277/480 Emergency - Dark Orange/Red with black letters C. Receptacle and Switch Labels: Al! receptacles and switches shall be labeled inside the box with pen with panel and circuit number. In addition provide a 'A" clear plastic dymo label on the front of the plate indicating panel and circuit number. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: Fungus —inert, self —extinguishing, 1—piece, self—locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color —coding. B. Junction Boxes: All junction boxes shall be painted per the following color code. In addition hand write the circuit or types of circuits inside each junction box. 1. 277 Volt Normal: Brown 2. 120 Volt Normal: Light Black so marker can be read. 3. 277 Volt emergency: Darkest Orange or Red as allowed by code authority 4. 120 Volt Normal: Dark Orange or Red as allowed by code authority 5. Fire Alain': Red 6. Intercom/Clock: Gray 7. Data/Phone: Blue 8. AV: Purple 9. Security: Yellow C. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self —tapping, stainless —steel screws or stainless —steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. 2.8 PANEL DIRECTORIES A. Directory: Provide typewritten circuit directory on the inside of each panel door under plastic cover, identifying the type and location of every load. At lighting and receptacle circuits, indicate room numbers and names. All room numbers shall be as furnished by the owner. 26 05 53 - 4 Tukwila School District (2) Showalter Middle School IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 05 53 B. Identification: Spare circuits will be identified as such in pencil. Permanent room numbers, as furnished by owner, shall be used for location identification. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Accessible Raceways and Metal —Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 30 A: Identify with orange self—adhesive vinyl label or snap — around label or self—adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. B. Accessible Raceways and Cables of Auxiliary Systems: Identify the following systems with color —coded, self—adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands or snap —around, color— coding bands: 1. Fire Alarm System: Red. 2. Fire —Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow. 3. Combined Fire Alarm and Security System: Red and blue. 4. Security System: Blue and yellow. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue. 6. Telecommunication System: Green and yellow. 7. Control Wiring: Green and red. C. Power —Circuit Conductor Identification: For primary and secondary conductors No. 4 AWG and larger in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes use color— coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above. D. Branch —Circuit Conductor Identification: Where there are conductors for more than three branch circuits in same junction or pull box, use aluminum wraparound marker labels. Identify each ungrounded conductor according to source and circuit number, E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list source and circuit number. F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field —installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory —installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. G. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground —line warning tape for power, lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable. Install underground— line warning tape for both direct —buried cables and cables in raceway. 26 05 53 - 5 ys�1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 H. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145 and apply self—adhesive warning labels. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. 1. Equipment with Multiple Power or Control Sources: Apply to door or cover of equipment including, but not limited to, the following: J. a. Power transfer switches. b. Controls with external control power connections. 2. Equipment Requiring Workspace Clearance According to NFPA 70: Unless otherwise indicated, apply to door or cover of equipment but not on flush panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. Instruction Signs: 1. Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. 2. Emergency Operating Instructions: Install instruction signs with white legend on a red background with minimum 3/8—inch— high letters for emergency instructions at equipment used for power transfer and load shedding. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label. that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Panel Directories: Provide panel directories numbered odd numbers on left and even on right. Multiple section panels shall have numbers continued. Provide circuit description and field room number for every circuit. For example "Receptacles Rooms 100,104" Spare and space to be noted in pencil. 2. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2—inch— high letters on 1-1/2—inch— high Iabel;I, where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Stenciled legend 4 inches high. c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. 3. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. c. Receptacles and switches where directed by owner d. Electrical switchgear and switchboards. 260553-6 Tukwila School District C70) Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 e. Transformers. f. Electrical substations. g. Emergency system boxes and enclosures. h. Motor —control centers. 1. Disconnect switches. j. Enclosed circuit breakers. k. Motor starters. 1. Push—button stations. m Power transfer equipment. n. Contactors. o. Remote —controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices. p. Data q. Master clock and program equipment. r. Intercommunication and call system master and staff stations. s. Television/audio components, racks, and controls. t. Fire —alarm control panel and annunciators. u. Security and intrusion —detection control stations, control panels, terminal cabinets, and racks. v. Monitoring and control equipment. w. Uninterruptible power supply equipment. x. Terminals, racks, and patch panels for voice and data communication and for signal and control functions. y. Junction boxes: System, voltage and circuit with black pen. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self —Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. E. Attach non -adhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. 26 05 53 - 7 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 F System. Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two—color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50—foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25—foot maximum intervals in congested areas. G. Color —Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded conductors. 1 Color shall be factory applied. 2. Colors for 208/120—V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White Colors for 480/277—V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray 4. Field —Applied, Color —Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half —lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility. J. Underground -Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous underground —line warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope exceeds 16 inches overall. Painted Identification: Prepare surface and apply paint according to Division 09 painting Sections. END OF SECTION 260553 26 05 53 - 8 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL COMMISIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4628 S 144th St, Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE A. Test the entire electrical installation to assure compliance with code and proper system operation. B. Electrical systems commissioning consists of static checks of component and system installations and actual testing of equipment conditions and functions. C. The Commissioning Authority shall review and approve, prior to use, all test procedures and forms used and shall witness a varying fraction of the checks and testing perfoinied by the Contractor. The Commissioning Authority shall review the completed check and test documentation of the Contractor for all checks and tests. 1.4 CIRCUIT TESTS A. Confor„ i to commissioning requirements. B. Test wiring and electrical equipment to verify absence of grounds and short circuits and verify proper operation, rotation, and phase relationship. Upon request, demonstrate operation of all equipment in accordance with the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide instruments and personnel required to conduct these tests. 1,5 LOAD BALANCE A. Checks shall be made for proper load balance between phase conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring unbalanced phases to within 15% of average load. B. Record all circuit changes on as -built drawings. C. Do not fabricate nameplates, or cover plate device labeling prior to load balance test and adjustments. 1.6 GROUNDING TEST A. Measure the OHMIC value of the Existing Electric Service Entrance metallic "Electrical System Ground" with reference to "Earth Ground" using the "Multiple Ground Rod" method 26 08 00 - 1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School COMMISIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 08 00 and suitable instruments. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms. If this resistance cannot be obtained, notify the Architect in writing. B. Provide paper copy of the test results in the record O&M manuals. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Thirty (30) days before any testing is conducted, submit an overall testing plan and schedule for electrical systems that lists the equipment, modes to be tested, dates of testing and parties conducting the tests. Put these tests into the master construction schedule. Keep this plan and schedule updated. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A Certified Testing Company shall perfolui the work of this Section and shall be qualified to test electrical equipment and is a NETA (National Electrical Testing Association) certified testing agency. The Certified Testing Company shall not be associated with the manufacturer(s) of the equipment or systems under test. B. The Contractor shall provide all test equipment necessary to fulfill the checks and testing requirements. Test equipment shall have been calibrated within one (1) year of its use on this Project. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND INSTRUMENTATION A. All shall be provided by and remain the property of the Contractor. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Division 01. 3.2 CHECKS AND TESTS A. Checks are intended to begin upon completion of a component or equipment installation. Testing generally occurs later when systems are energized or nearing that point. Beginning system testing before full completion, does not relieve the Contractor from fully completing the system as soon as possible, including all construction checklists and may require retesting portions of the system once all components are fully functioning. B. The check and test procedures and record forms shall contain the following: 1. The Subcontractor(s) executing checks or tests. 2. A list of the integral components being inspected and tested, equipment tag numbers, manufacturer, model number, pertinent performance information / rating data. 3. Test equipment used. 4. Construction checklists associated with the components, if any. 5. Any special required conditions of the check or test for each procedure. 26 08 00 - 2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms COMM1SION NG OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00 6. Items, conditions or functions to be inspected, verified or tested, the checks and testing method given and a place provided with results recorded. 7. Acceptance criteria (or reference by specific table where the acceptance criteria is found). 8. For each procedure, list the technician performing check or test and company, witnesses of the tests and dates of tests. 9. Sampling strategies used. C. The test procedures for dynamic equipment like lighting controls, emergency generator or fire alarm shall contain more step-by-step procedures. The test procedures and forms for more static components like panelboards, switchgear, circuit breakers, transformers, etc., can be more checklist -like in format. For each piece of equipment, checks and test procedures and their documentation record forms may be different documents or combined in the same document, but checks and tests should be grouped. D. At the Commissioning Authority's discretion, if large numbers or repeated deficiencies are encountered, the Contractor shall test and troubleshoot all remaining systems at issue on their own before commissioning with the Commissioning Authority will resume. E. Sampling for Identical Units. When there are a number of identical units, at the Commissioning Authority's discretion, some or all procedures of a test for a piece of equipment or assembly may be omitted when these same tests on other pieces of identical equipment or assemblies were conducted without deficiency. 3.3 LOAD BALANCE A. Checks shall be made for proper load balance between phase conductors and make adjustments as necessary to bring unbalanced phases to within 15% of average load. B. Record all circuit changes on as -built drawings. C. Do not fabricate nameplates, or cover plate device labeling prior to load balance test and adjustments. 3.4 GENERAL ELECTRICAL TESTING A. Conform to commissioning requirements. B. Test wiring and electrical equipment to verify absence of grounds and short circuits and verify proper operation, rotation, and phase relationship. Upon request, demonstrate operation of all equipment in accordance with the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide instruments and personnel required to conduct these tests. 3.5 GROUNDING TEST A. Measure the OHMIC value of the Existing Electric Service Entrance metallic "Electrical System Ground" with reference to "Earth Ground" using the "Multiple Ground Rod" method and suitable instruments. Maximum resistance to ground shall be less than 10 ohms. If this resistance cannot be obtained, notify the Architect in writing. 26 08 00 - 3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School COMMISIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 08 00 B. Provide paper copy of the test results in the record O&M manuals. 3.6 EQUIPMENT -SPECIFIC TESTING A. The following paragraphs define the testing requirements for each type of system or feature that is a part of the project. The Commissioning Authority shall use this information to develop specific testing procedures for each of the systems to be commissioned. The Contractor shall be responsible for support, execution and coordination of these tests as described in the project specifications including intersystem tests and interlocks with systems in other Divisions. B. Common Testing Requirements: 1. The following requirements apply to all electrical systems and features that are to be commissioned when referenced below. Tests shall. a. Verify functionality and compliance with the design intent for each individual sequence module in the sequences of operation. Verify proper operation of all control strategies, energy efficiency and self -diagnostics features by stepping through each sequence and documenting equipment and system performance. Test every step in every written sequence and other significant modes, sequences and operational features not mentioned in written sequences; including startup, normal operation, shutdown, scheduled on and off, unoccupied and manual modes, safeties, alarms, over -rides, lockouts and power failure. b. Verify all alarm and high and low limit functions and messages generated on all points with alarm settings. c. Verify integrated performance of all components and control system components, including all interlocks and interactions with other equipment and systems. d. Verify shut down and restart capabilities both for scheduled and unscheduled events (e.g. power failure recovery and normal scheduled start/stop). e. When applicable, demonstrate a full cycle from off to on and no load to full load and then to no load and off. f. Verify time of day schedules and setpoints. g. Verify all energy saving control strategies. h. Verify that monitoring system graphics are representative of the systems and that all points and control elements are in the same location on the graphic as they are in the field. Verify operator control of all commandable control system points including proper security level access. j. When testing procedures for commissioned equipment are listed in NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems the NETA test procedures shalt be part of the testing requirements of this specification. Additional testing procedures may be listed in this specification. C. Common Acceptance Criteria: 1. The following common acceptance criteria apply to all equipment, assemblies and features: a. For the conditions, sequences and modes tested, the equipment, integral components and related equipment shall respond to varying loads and changing conditions and parameters appropriately as expected, according to the sequences of operation, as specified, according to acceptable operating practice and the manufacturer's performance specifications. Verify that equipment operates within tolerances specified in: governing codes, acceptance criteria contained in the 26 08 00 - 4 Tukwila School District Q Showalter Middle School COMMISIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 08 00 construction documents, manufacturer's literature and according to good operating practice. b. Systems shall accomplish their intended function and performance. c. All safety trips shall require a manual reset to allow a system restart. d. Resetting a manual safety shall result in a stable, safe, and predictable return to normal operation by the system. e. Safety circuits and permissive control circuits shall function in all possible combinations of selector switch positions (hand, auto, inverter, bypass, etc.). f. Other acceptance criteria is given in the equipment testing requirements articles or referenced standards. g. Additional acceptance criteria will be developed by the Commissioning Authority when detailed test procedures are developed. h. When testing procedures for commissioned equipment are listed in NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electric Power Distribution Equipment and Systems the NETA performance criteria shall apply. D. Equipment -Specific Testing Requirements: 1. Scheduled Lighting Controls: a. Test Methods: Utilize active testing, and trending when available. If able to trend, trend all zones over a week period. b. Sampling Strategy: Manually test all of the zones. 2. Occupancy Sensor/Daylighting Controls: a. Test all unit functions, including sensor sensitivity and time -to -OFF functions and ensure that sensor location is proper and won't be tripped inadvertently by other occupants and movements outdoors, etc. b. Test Methods: Utilize active test methods. c. Sampling Strategy: Manually test all of the sensors. d. Additional Acceptance Criteria: Reasonable sensitivity, no inadvertent trips, lights go off or dim within 5 seconds of design. 3. Fire Alarm System: a. Test the fire alarm and smoke detection systems according to NFPA 110 (current edition adopted by AHJ), and Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm". END OF SECTION 26 08 00 260800-5 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms COMMISIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 08 00 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 26 08 00 - 6 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 26 22 00 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Locations: 1. Showalter. Middle School 4268 S. 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A. General purpose transformers. B. K-factor transformers rated for nonlinear loads. 1.4 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 260501 — Basic Materials and Methods for Electrical. B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding 1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE C57.94 - Recommended Practice for Installation, Application, Operation, and Maintenance of Dry -Type General Purpose Distribution and Power Transformers; 1982 (R2006). B. IEEE C57.96 - Guide for Loading Dry -Type Distribution and Power Transformers; 1999 (R2004). C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; 2010. D. NECA 409 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Dry -Type Transformers; 2009. E. NEMA ST 20 - Dry -Type Transformers for General Applications;; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1992 (R1.997). F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)., 2008 G. NEMA TP 1 - Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers; 2002. 262200-1 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Permit Showalter Middle School Renovations LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. UL 506 - Standard for Specialty Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 1561 - Standard for Dry -Type General Purpose and Power Transformers; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors required for mounting of transformers. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include voltage, kVA, impedance, tap configurations, insulation system class and rated temperature rise, efficiency, sound level, enclosure ratings, outline and support point dimensions, weight, required clearances, service condition requirements, and installed features. B. Maintenance Data: Include recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of transformers. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Energy efficiency standards shall be Class I Efficiency Levels for distribution transformers specified in Table 4-2 of the "Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers" published by the National Electrical manufacturers Association (NEMA TP-1-2002). 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to transformer internal components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Cutler -Hammer LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 2 c TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Permit Showalter Middle School Renovations LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS B. Square D C. Siemens 2.2 GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSFORMERS A. Description: Self -cooled, two winding transformers listed and labeled as complying with UL 506 or UL 1561; ratings as indicated on the drawings. B. Primary Voltage: 480 volts delta, 3 phase. C. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase. D. Insulation System and Allowable Average Winding Temperature Rise: 1. 15 kVA and Larger: Class 220 degrees C insulation system with 150 degrees C average winding temperature rise. E. Coil Conductors: Continuous copper windings with terminations brazed or welded. F. Winding Taps: 1. 15 kVA through 300 kVA: Two 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps above and four 2.5 percent full capacity primary taps below rated voltage. G. Energy Efficiency: Standard efficiency complying with NEMA TP 1. H. Mounting Provisions: 1. 15 kVA through 75 kVA: Suitable for wall mounting. 1. Transformer Enclosure: Comply with NEMA ST 20. 1. Construction: Heavy gage steel. a. 15 kVA and Larger: Ventilated. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard grey, suitable for outdoor installations. 3. Provide lifting eyes or brackets. Accessories: 1. Mounting Brackets: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets. 2. Lug Kits: Sized as required for termination of conductors as indicated on the drawings. K. Description: NEMA TP-1-2002, factory -assembled, air cooled dry type transformers, ratings as indicated. L Efficiency ratings shall meet or exceed the following: Single Phase Three Phase LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 3 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Permit Showalter Middle School Renovations LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS KVA Efficiency KVA Efficiency 15 97.7 15 97.0 25 98.0 30 97.5 37.5 98.2 45 97.7 50 98.3 75 98.0 75 98.5 112.5 98.2 100 98.6 150 98.3 167 98.7 225 98.5 250 98.8 300 98.6 333 98.9 500 98.7 750 98.8 15-50 kVA: 45 dB. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. B. Install transformers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Use flexible conduit, under the provisions of Section 26 05 34, 2 feet (600 mm) minimum length, for connections to transformer case. Make conduit connections to side panel of enclosure. D. Mount wall -mounted transformers using integral flanges or accessory brackets furnished by the manufacturer. E. Provide nameplates; refer to Section 26 05 53 for product requirements and location. F. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. G. Remove shipping braces and adjust bolts that attach the core and coil mounting bracket to the enclosure according to manufacturer's recommendations in order to reduce audible noise transmission. H. Where not factory -installed, install lugs sized as required for termination of conductors as shown on the drawings. I. Identify transformers in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Measure primary and secondary voltages and make appropriate tap adjustments. B. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 3.3 CLEANING LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 4 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Permit Showalter Middle School Renovations LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS A. Clean dirt and debris from transformer components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish. END OF SECTION 26 22 00 LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 5 TUKWILA SCHOOL DISTRICT Permit Showalter Middle School Renovations LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK LOW -VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 262200 - 6 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 27 17 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4268 S 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide complete electrical connections to equipment. 1.4 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code (NEC); National Fire Protection Association, most recent edition adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements. B. NEMA WD 1 — General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices, National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1999 (R 2010). C. NEMA WD 6 — Wiring Devices — Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 2002 (R 2012). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. C. Provide detailed wiring diagrams to interconnect components for complete operation of various electrical systems, including devices and components provided under other Sections of these Documents. D. Provide layouts of equipment and details of mounting method for approval prior to installation to ensure proper execution of the work. E. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate generally the locations of materials and equipment, and shall be followed as closely as possible. Coordinate the work under this Section with the Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Mechanical and the Drawings of other trades for exact dimensions, clearances, and roughing -in locations. Cooperate with other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others. 26 27 17 - 1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 27 17 F. All devices, outlets, cabinets, equipment, panels, light fixtures, switches can be field located by Owner's Representative within 20-feet of the designed locations prior to rough -in work without extra compensation. 1. Coordinate electrical work with mechanical installations. Verify final mechanical equipment locations with mechanical installer prior to commencement of electrical work. Connect power wiring to mechanical equipment through starters, contactors, and disconnects as required. Maintain clearances around mechanical equipment to allow access for maintenance per NEC codes and local codes. 2. Coordinate wiring interconnections for the complete operation of electrical -mechanical equipment to include items provided by other Divisions. Examine equipment connection information with manufacturer's shop drawings and submittals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment. 1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1. 2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multi -conductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. 3 Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. B. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 29 13. C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 05 01. D. Raceways and Boxes: As specified in Section 26 05 33. E. Wire and Cable: As specified in 26 05 19. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipmentis ready for electrical connection, wiring and energization. 3.2 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connections in damp, wet or exterior locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connections with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field supplied attachment plug is required. 26 27 17 - 2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 27 17 F. Install suitable strain -relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements. END OF SECTION 26 27 17 26 27 17 - 3 01114, Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 27 17 262717-4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 — GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, B. Review the Specifications and Drawings for coordination information that applies to work under this Specification. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4, 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 Division 01, and Division 26. with additional requirements and Straight -blade convenience, hospital -grade, isolated -ground, receptacles. USB charger devices. GFCI receptacles. SPD receptacles. Hazardous (classified) location receptacles. Twist -lock receptacles. Pendant cord -connector devices. Cord and plug sets. Toggle switches. Decorator -style convenience devices. Wall switch sensor light switches with dual -technology sensors. Wall switch sensor light switches with passive -infrared sensors. Wall switch sensor light switches with ultrasonic sensors. Digital timer light switches. Residential devices. Wall -box dimmers. Wall plates and gaskets. Cable reels. Floor service outlets. Poke -through assemblies. Prefabricated multioutlet assemblies. Service poles. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS and tamper -resistant WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms A. Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes". B. Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding". C. Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems". 1.4 REFERENCES WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 A. FS W-C-596 — Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G, 2001. B. FS W-S-896 — Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush -mounted (General Specification); Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999. C. NECA I — Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. D. NEMA WD 1 — General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010). E. NEMA WD 6 — Wiring Device — Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R 2012). F. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, including all applicable amendments and supplements. G. UL 20 — General -Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, including all revisions. H. UL 498 — Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, including all revisions. 1. UL 514D — Cover Plates for Flush -Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, including all revisions. J. UL 943 — Ground -Fault Circuit -Interrupters; Current Edition, including all revisions. K. UL 1449 — Standard for Surge Protective Devices; Current Edition, including all revisions. L. UL 1472 — Solid -State Dimming Controls; Current Edition, including all revisions. M UL 1917 — Solid -State Fan Speed Controls; Current Edition, including all revisions. 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. BAS: Building Automation System. B. EMI: Electromagnetic Interference. C. GFCI: Ground -Fault Circuit Interrupter. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms D. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch -circuit conductor. E. RFI: Radio -Frequency Interference. F SPD: Surge Protective Device. G. UTP: Unshielded Twisted Pair. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Submit catalog cuts for all items proposed to be furnished and installed under this Section. C. Product Data: For each type of product, provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1. Wall Dimmers: Include derating information for ganged multiple devices. 2. Surge Protection Receptacles: Include surge current rating, voltage protection rating (VPR), for all protection modes and diagnostics information. D. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and processes used for premarking wall plates. E. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of all wiring devices. G Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of the Project: 1. Refer to Division 01 for additional provisions. 2. Service/Power Poles: One for every 10, but no fewer than one. 3. Floor Service -Outlet Assemblies: One for every 10, but no fewer than one. 4. Poke -Through, Fire -Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five floor service outlets installed, but no fewer than one. 5. Screwdrivers for Tamper -Resistant Screws: Two of each type of screw. 6. Extra Keys for Locking Switches: Two of each type. 7. Extra Surge Protection Receptacles: Two of each type. 8. Extra GFC Protection Receptacles: Two of each type. 9. Extra Wall Plates: One of each style, size, and finish. 1.7 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Submit field quality -control reports. 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 A. Operating and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturer's packing label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. 1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum three (3) years documented experience. C. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated for all wiring devices. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space, in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other Sections or by others. B. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. C. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings. D. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. E. Notify Owner's Representative of any conflicts or deviations from the Contract Documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. F. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc.: www.leviton.com C. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc.: www.legrand.us D. Cooper Wiring Devices: www.cooperwiringdevices.com WIRING DEVICES 262726-4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 2.2 APPLICATIONS WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C. Provide weather -resistant GFCI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. D. Provide GFCI receptacles for all receptacles installed within 6-feet of sinks. E. Provide GFCI receptacles for all receptacles installed in kitchens. F. Provide GFCI receptacles for all receptacles serving electric drinking fountains. G. Provide GFCI receptacles for all receptacles serving vending machines. H Provide GFCI receptacles for all receptacles in Commercial Garages, Repair and/or Storage per Article 511 of the National Electrical Code (NEC). 1. Unless noted otherwise, do not use combination switch/receptacle devices. 2.3 GENERAL WIRING -DEVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. 2. Devices shall comply with the requirements of this Section. D. Devices for Owner -Furnished Equipment: 1. Receptacles: match plug configurations. 2. Cord and Plug Sets: match equipment requirements. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from a single source from a single manufacturer. 2.4 APPROVED PRODUCTS WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 5 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 DEVICE LEVITON HUBBELL COOPER 1-POLE SWITCH CSB1-20 1221 2221 3-WAY SWITCH CSB3-20 1223 2223 4-WAY SWITCH CSB4-20 1224 2224 DUPLEX RECEPTACLE 5362 5362 CR5362 DUPLEX GFCI RECEPTACLE 8899 GF5362 VGF20 DUPLEX TAMPER - RESISTANT RECEPTACLE 2.5 WALL SWITCHES 8200SG GFR5362TR TR8300 A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. B. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general -use snap switches with silver alloy contacts; types as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. C. Switches: 120/277 V, 20 amp rated, in the following configurations: 1. Single Pole. 2. Two Pole. 3. Three Way. 4. Four Way. 5. Pilot -Light. 6. Key -Operated. 7. Single -Pole, Double -Throw, Momentary -Contact, Center -Off: for use with mechanically held lighting contactors. 8. Key -Operated, Single -Pole, Double -Throw, Momentary -Contact, Center -Off: for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory -supplied key in lieu of switch handle. 2.6 STRAIGHT -BLADE RECEPTACLES A. All Receptacles: Self -grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1, and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the Drawings. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 6 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring, and with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. B. Single Receptacles: Heavy duty, grounding type, complying with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6. 1. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. C. Duplex Receptacles: Heavy duty, specification grade, 20-ampere grounding type, 125 V, complying with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. One piece integral all brass mounting strap with back wired grounding terminal. 2. Back and side wired conductor terminals. 3. External wiring clamps with #10 large head brass screws. 4. NEMA Configuration: 5-20R. D. Hospital -Grade Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. E. Isolated Ground Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Description: straight -blade, equipment grounding contacts shall be concealed only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from the mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to the receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. F. Tamper -Resistant Duplex Convenience Receptacles: 25 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Description: Labeled and complying with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities", Article "Pediatric Locations" Section. 2.7 USB CHARGER DEVICES A. Tamper -Resistant, USB Charger Receptacles: 12 V DC, 2.0 A, USB Type A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 1310, and FS W-C-596. 1. Description: Single -piece, rivetless, nickel -plated, all -brass grounding system. Nickel - plated, brass mounting strap. 2. USB Receptacles: Dual, Type A. 3. Line Voltage Receptacles: Dual, two -pole, three -wire, and self -grounding. B. Hospital -Grade, USB Charger Receptacles: 12 V DC, 2.0 A, USB Type A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 1310, and FS W-C-596. 1. Description: Labeled and complying with NFPA 70, "Health Care Facilities", Article "Pediatric Locations" Section. 2. USB Receptacles: Dual, Type A. 3. Line Voltage Receptacles: Dual, two -pole, three -wire, and self -grounding. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 7 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School WIRNG DEVICES Temporary Portable Classrooms 2.8 GFCI RECEPTACLES 26 27 26 A. General Description: 1. 125 V, 20 A, straight -blade, feed -through type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. 3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection. 2.9 SPD RECEPTACLES A. General Description: 1. 125 V, 20 A, straight -blade type. 2. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, UL 498, UL 1449, and FS W-C-596. 3. Integral SPD in line to ground, line to neutral, and neutral to ground. 4. SPD Components: Multiple metal -oxide varistors; with a nominal clamp -level rating of 400 V and minimum single transient pulse energy dissipation of 240 J, according to IEEE C62.41.2 and IEEE C62.45. 5. Active SPD Indication: Visual and audible, with light visible in face of device to indicate device is "active" or "no longer in service". B. Isolated -Ground, Duplex SPD Convenience Receptacles: 1. Grounding: Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from the mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. 2.10 HAZARDOUS (CLASSIFIED) LOCATION RECEPTACLES A. Comply with NEMA FB 11 and UL 1010. 2.11 TWIST -LOCKING RECEPTACLES A. Twist -Lock, Single Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration L5-20R or as specified on the Drawings, and UL 498. B. Twist -Lock, Isolated -Ground, Single Convenience Receptacles: 125 V, 20A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration L5-20R or as specified on the Drawings, and UL 498. 1. Grounding: Equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical isolation from the mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction and not dependent on removable parts. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 8 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 2.12 PENDANT CORD -CONNECTOR DEVICES WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 A. Description: 1. Matching, locking -type plug and receptacle body connector. 2. NEMA WD 6, configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596. 3. Body: Nylon, with screw -open, cable -gripping jaws, and provisions for attaching external cable grip. 4. External Cable Grip: Woven, wire -mesh type, made of high -strength, galvanized -steel wire strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for corresponding connector. 2.13 CORD AND PLUG SETS A. Description: 1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. 2. Cord: Rubber -insulated, stranded -copper conductors, with Type SOW -A jacket; with the green -insulating grounding conductor, and ampacity of at least 130-percent of the equipment rating. 3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable -clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection. 2.14 CABLE REELS A. Industrial grade, corrosion resistant steel, 20-amp, UL Listed, 45-foot cord. B. Manufacturer: Hubbell HBL45123R220 series with 5-foot supply cord, 20-amp supply plug, and (2) duplex receptacles on the end of the cord. 2.15 DECORATOR -STYLE DEVICES A. Convenience Receptacles: Square -face, 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. B. Tamper -Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square -face, 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. 1. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper -Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section. C. Weather -Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square -face, 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, and UL 498, D. GFCI Feed -Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square -face, 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 9 ""•\ Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 E. GFCI, Tamper -Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square -face, 125 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1 and WD 6, configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A. 1. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper -Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section. F. Toggle Switches: Square -face, 120/277 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W- S-896. G. Lighted Toggle Switches: Square -face, 120/277 V, 20 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, and UL 20. 1. Description: with LED -lighted handle, illuminated when switch is off. 2.16 WALL SWITCH SENSOR LIGHT SWITCH, DUAL -TECHNOLOGY A. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting -control sensor arid conventional switch light ing-control unit using dual -technology. 1. Connections: a. Provisions for connection to BAS. b. Hard wired. c. Wireless. 2, Rated 960 W at 120 VAC for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120/277 VAC for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hP at 120 VAC. 3. Integral relay for connection to BAS. 4. Adjustable time delay; 5, 10, 15, or 20 minutes and set at 20 minutes. 5. Able to be locked to Automatic -On or Manual -On mode. 6. Automatic Light -Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 footcandles. 7. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 2, and FS W-S-896. 2.17 WALL SWITCH SENSOR LIGHT SWITCH, PASS1VE-INFRARED A. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting -control sensor and conventional switch lighting -control unit using passive -infrared. 1. Connections: a. Provisions for connection to BAS. b. Hard wired. c. Wireless. 2. Rated 960 W at 120 VAC for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120/277 VAC for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hP at 120 VAC. 3. Integral relay for connection to BAS. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 10 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 4. Adjustable time delay; 5, 10, 15, or 20 minutes and set at 20 minutes. 5. Able to be locked to Automatic -On or Manual -On mode. 6. Automatic Light -Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 footcandles. 7. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 2, and FS W-S-896. 2.18 WALL SWITCH SENSOR LIGHT SWITCH, ULTRASONIC WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 A. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination lighting -control sensor and conventional switch lighting -control unit using ultrasonic. 1. Connections: a. Provisions for connection to BAS. b. Hard wired. e. Wireless. 2. Rated 960 W at 120 VAC for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120/277 VAC for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hP at 120 VAC. 3. Integral relay for connection to BAS. 4. Adjustable time delay; 5, 10, 15, or 20 minutes and set at 20 minutes. 5. Able to be locked to Automatic -On or Manual -On mode. 6. Automatic Light -Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 footcandles. 7. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 2, and FS W-S-896. 2.19 DIGITAL TIMER LIGHT SWITCH A. Description: Switchbox-mounted, combination digital timer and conventional switch lighting - control unit, with backlit display, with selectable time interval in 10-minute increments. 1. Rated 960 W at 120 VAC for tungsten lighting, 10 A at 120/277 VAC for fluorescent or LED lighting, and 1/4 hP at 120 VAC. 2. Integral relay for connection to BAS. 2.20 DIMMERS A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full -wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on -off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider, with single -pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472. C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: 120 V; control shall follow square -law dimming curve. On -off switch positions shall bypass dimmer module. 1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices. Illuminated when "off'. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 11 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular, compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low -end dimming; dimmer -ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20-percent of full brightness. E. LED Dimmer Switches: Modular, compatible with LED drivers; trim potentiometer to adjust low -end dimming; capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20-percent of full brightness. 2.21 COVER PLATES AND GASKETS A. All cover plates shall comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size: Standard or as otherwise indicated. 3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. B. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate -Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.035-inch thick, satin finished, Type 302 Stainless Steel. 3. Materials for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized Steel. 4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring -loaded liftiift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. C. Interior Device Cover Plates: 1. 302 Stainless Steel, with laser etching marking panel name and circuit number. Refer to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for more information. 2. Receptacle cover plates for special use shall be pre -marked by the manufacturer: a. UPS b. UPS — COMPUTER c. ISOLATED GROUND d. GFCI PROTECTED D. Wet -Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather - resistant, die-cast aluminum with lockable cover. E. Exterior Device Cover Plates: Wiring devices installed outdoors or wet areas shall be provided with hinged, gasketed, weatherproof covers. F. Exterior Receptacle Hinged Covers: Exterior receptacles accessible to the general public (building exterior at grade, etc.) shall be installed in flush cast aluminum outlet covers with hinged cover and keyed lock. Approved manufacturer: Pass & Seymour Catalog No. 4600. G. Cover Plate Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sound -isolating and fire -protective molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000, formed to fit the electrical device and cover plate. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 12 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide STC Sound Control; STC Box Seal or comparable product by one of the following: a. Trademark Soundproofing. b. Or approved equal. 2. Sound Rating: Cover plate gaskets to improve STC of recessed outlets by 7 dB or higher. 3. Fire Rating: UL listed as Wall Opening Protective Device for use in 1-hour fire -rated walls, including back-to-back outlets. 2.22 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS A. Type: Modular, flush -type, dual -service units suitable for wiring method used. B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communications cabling. C. Service Plates: Round, die-cast aluminum with satin finish. D. Power Receptacles: NEMA WD 6, configuration 5-20R, white finish unless otherwise indicated. E. Data Communications Outlets: Two modular, keyed, color -coded, RJ-45 jacks for twisted pair cabling complying with requirements in Section 27 15 13 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling". 2.23 POKE -THROUGH ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Devices-Kellems. 2. Pass & Seymour. 3. Square D; by Schneider Electric. 4. Wiremold/Legrand. B. Description: 1. Factory -fabricated and —wired assembly of below -floor junction box with multichanneled, through -floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service -outlet assembly. 2. Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements. 3. Service -Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two duplex receptacles and space for four RJ- 45 jacks complying with requirements in Section 27 15 13 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling". 4. Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness. 5. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor -ceiling assembly. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 13 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 6. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch cored openings and reestablish fire rating of the floor. 7. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors with a minimum of four, four -pair cables that comply with requirements in Section 27 15 13 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling". 2.24 PREFABRICATED MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Devices-Kellems. 2. Wiremold/Legrand. 3. Or approved equal. B. Description: 1. Two-piece, surface metal raceway, with factory -wired multioutlet harness. 2. Components shall be products from a single manufacturer, designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles. C. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish. D. Multioutlet Harness: 1. Receptacles: 20 A, 125 V, NEMA WD 6, configuration 5-20R receptacles, complying with NEMA WD 1, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 2. Receptacle Spacing: 9-inches on center. 3. Wiring: No. 12 AWG solid, type THHN copper, two -circuit, connecting alternating receptacles. 2.25 SERVJCE POLES A. Description: 1. Factory -assembled and —wired units to extend power, voice, and data communications from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in a pole near the floor. 2. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch square cross section, with height adequate to extend from floor to at least 6-inches above ceiling, and with separate channels for power wiring and voice/data communications cabling. 3. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange, with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to ceiling supports; with pole foot and carpet pad attachment. 4. Finishes: Manufacturer's standard painted finish and trim combination. 5. Wiring: Sized for minimum of five No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors and a minimum of four, four -pair, Category 3 or Category 5e voice and data communications cables. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 14 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 6. Power Receptacles: Two duplex, 20 A, straight -blade receptacles complying with requirements in this Section. 7. Data Communications Outlets: Four Rj-45 jacks complying with requirements in Section 27 15 13 "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling". 2.26 FINISHES A. Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: White, or as selected by the Architect, or as otherwise indicated. 2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red. 3. SPD Devices: Blue. 4. Isolated -Ground Receptacles: Orange or with Orange triangle on face. B. Cover Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color, otherwise 302 stainless steel. PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Device or equipment mounting height given herein the Specifications, Drawings, and/or Contract Documents, are intended to provide general guidelines pursuant to industry standards. Such guidelines may not be exact or accurate and may or may not conflict with other trades installation without verification. Provide field coordination and verification with other divisions. 1. Verify counter heights with cabinet installer and cabinet shop drawings, prior to rough -in for outlets. 2. Examine other trades shop drawings to ensure that such mounting heights are appropriate for the intended device use, and the device locations do not conflict with other components. Immediately report impaired device use and conflict/location to the Owner's Representative for resolution. Devices may be moved up to 20-feet without additional compensation. 3. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. B. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. 1. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 15 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 C. The Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate generally the locations of materials, equipment, and devices. These Drawings shall be followed as closely as possible. 1. Coordinate the work under this Section with the Architectural, Structural, Plumbing, Heating and Air -Conditioning, and the drawings of other trades for exact dimensions, clearances, and roughing -in locations. 2. Cooperate with other trades in order to make minor field adjustments to accommodate the work of others. 3. Devices and outlets can be field located by Owner's Representative within 20-feet of the designed locations prior to rough -in work, without extra compensation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes, and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. 2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. 3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint, unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. 4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete. C. Conductors 1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. 2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. 3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. 4. Existing conductors (where applicable): a. Cut back and pigtail. b. Replace all damaged conductors. c. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. d. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough. D. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. E. Install wall switches with OFF position down. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 16 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School WIRING DEVICES Temporary Portable Classrooms 26 27 26 F. Install two or more wiring devices shown in one location under a common cover plate. Install cover plates with edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces. Do not install more than one device in a single gang position. G. Before installation rough -in, device locations may be revised by the Owner's Representative within 20-feet of the designed contract location, at no additional cost. Device Installation.: 1. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. 2. Keep each wiring device in its package, or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. 3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. 4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6-inches in length. 5. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding -head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, 2/3s to 3/4s of the way around the terminal screw. 6. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the manufacturer. 7. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-amp circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. 8. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device(s). 9. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device mounting screws in the yokes, allowing metal -to -metal contact. Receptacle Orientation: 1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles at the bottom, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the right. 2. Install hospital -grade receptacles in patient -care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top. J. Device Cover Plates: Do not use oversized or extra -deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. K. Cover Plate Gaskets: Place gasket over exposed outlet boxes flush with wall surface with device protruding through precut opening in seal. Fit cover plate over gasket and hold in place with plate -securing screws. Dimmer Switches: 1. Install dimmer switches within terms of their listing. 2. Verify that dimmer switches used for fan -speed control are listed for that application. 3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturer's device listing conditions in the written instructions. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 17 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 M. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multi -gang cover plates. N. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES A. Install non -feed through -type GFCIGFC1 receptacles where protection of downstream receptacles are not required. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Division 01. B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. C. Operate each wall switch, dimmer switch, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper operation. D. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. E. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. F. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital display indicators of measurement. G. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. 2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-amp Load: A value of 6-percent or higher is unacceptable. 3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. 4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. 5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. 6. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above. H. Test straight -blade convenience outlets in patient -care areas for the retention force of the grounding -blade according to NFPA 99. Retention force shall not be less than 4 oz. Wiring devices ' be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. J. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 18 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms K. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and cover plates to be flush and level. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems". WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard and circuit number identification. Use hot, stamped, or engraved machine printing with black -filled lettering on face of cover plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 19 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26 - 20 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 18 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4628 S 144th St, Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fusible switches. B. Nonfusible switches. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 262813 - Fuses. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013. C. NETA STD ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association 2014. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches. 26 28 18 - 1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 18 B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience and with service facilities within 100 miles (160 km) of Project. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Electrical/Cutler-Hammer. B. Siemens. C. Square D. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. 1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. 2. Handle lockable in OFF position. 3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. 1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. 2. Handle lockable in OFF position. C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R. D. Switches shall be equipped with the number of poles, voltage and current rating required for the equipment being served. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. 26 28 18 - 2 Tukwila School District Cip) Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 18 C. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. D. Provide disconnect switches as indicated on the drawings, schedules, at motors, motor driven equipment, motor controllers, electric heating equipment, appliances and other equipment items unless the equipment has a self-contained, code approved disconnecting method. E. Mounting: Coordinate mounting location with Equipment Installation Contractor. In general, mounting height shall be 72" (maxiinum to top of switch). END OF SECTION 26 28 18 - 3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 18 26 28 18 - 4 Tukwila School. District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, 27 and Division 28. B. Review the Specifications and Drawings for coordination information that apply to work under this Specification. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School Portables 4268 S. 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SCOPE TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 Division 01, Division 26, Division with additional requirements and A. Provide complete and comprehensive cabling and te„iiination for local area networks. 1.4 WORK INCLUDED A. The work includes all necessary labor, installation, preparation, materials, equipment, services, and other items required, whether specified or not, to provide a complete and fully operational local area network cabling and jack system conforming to ANSI/TIA 568-D (Parts 1 and 3) and ANSUTIA-568-C.2 Category 6. B. The work requires installation of cabling, station jacks, patch cables, and patch panels, racks, cable tray, wire managers, 110 blocks, J-hooks, innerduct and other associated components. C. The work includes performance of diagnostic tests on all cables, connectors and components. A signed written report of all diagnostic findings shall be provided to the Owner. Using the results of the diagnostic report, the Contractor is responsible for repairing all cable, connector and component problems. 1.5 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT A. All wiring switches, modules, computer equipment, file servers, workstations, network interface cards, and related hardware and software will be provided by the Owner. B. No other equipment furnished. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 1.6 DRAWINGS AND PLANS TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 A. All Telecommunication devices and components shown on the drawings and plans shall be provided by the telecommunications contractor. Devices and components shall consist of but not be limited to, faceplates, jacks, UTP and Fiber optic cabling, UTP and Fiber optic patch panels, wire managers, innerduct, wall mount cabinets, etc.. 1.7 PHYSICAL LAYER COMPONENTS A. All components shall be new and shall comply with IEEE 802.3ab Standards for 1000-Base-T Ethernet over twisted pair media and ANSI/TIA Standard 568 (use most current revision). All components shall be housed in appropriate equipment racks so as to assure a solid, permanent installation. Bidder shall identify each proposed data system component by manufacturer and part number including data cabling, fiber optic cabling, data and data/phone jacks, UTP and fiber optic station and head end patch cables, patch panels, mounting devices for termination blocks, and equipment cabinets or racks. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIAL, COMPONENTS AND EQUIPMENT A. All material, components, and equipment shall be new and of high quality. The components and equipment furnished must have a proven track record, and if required, the Contractor must furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. All work to comply with ANSI/TIA Category 6 requirements. Specification is based on products by Superior Essex/Ortronics. B. All telecom outlet back boxes shall be at minimum 4-11/16 square and 2-1/8 inch deep. 2.2 WARRANTY A. Installer shall be certified by the manufacturer to provide the Ortroinics CIP or CIP-ESP, nCompassmi Limited Lifetime static, Dynamic and applications warranty to the end user. The end user must also receive a Limited Lifetime product warranty. Refer to www.ncompass- systems.com or www.legrand.us for additional information on the nCompass warranty. Contractor shall provide electronic media for all above listed information. 2.3 TELECOM OUTLETS A. ANSI/TIA 568-C Category 6 modular jacks. Provide inserts for number of data outlets shown on Drawings. Plate and outlets fog white color. Provide Ortronics OR-40300664 single gang faceplate and OR-S21600 or OR-S22600 Category 6 insert, provide yellow color icon for data and blue for voice, and label. Provide fog white blanks in unused outlets. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 1.0 00 - 2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 B. Phone and data are same on this project. C. Floor box outlets if applicable shall be the same as above. D. T568B Type terminations. E. Bend radius limitations must be adhered to inside the telecom outlet box Service loops of 1-3' should be worked into the ceiling for future use. 2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLE ANSUTIA 568-C, Category 6, 4-pair 23-gauge. Superior Essex DataGain white, plenum rated. Part Number: 66-240-4B 2.5 CABINETS A. Wall Mount Cabinet: Provide a dual hinged wall cabinet with front and rear door sections. Eaton VLWM3625PB. B. Power cabinet with cooling fan option. C. Provide all patch panels, wire managers, grounding lugs, etc. as indicated on drawings in cainet. D. Wire management panels shall be Ortronics OR-808044915. 2.6 PATCH PANEL A. ANSI/TIA 568-C Category 6, ports as shown on Drawings, 110 on back, RJ45 on front. Ortronics #OR-PHD66U48. B. T568B Type teuiiinations. 2.7 PATCH CABLE A. Data: Ortronics #OR-MC6, ANSUTIA Category 6, 4-pair, 23-gauge, lengths and colors as follows: Data -White Telephone -Black 3' 50 10 5' 50 10 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM Temporary Portable Classrooms 27 10 00 2.8 TELEPHONE BACKBONE CABLE A. Not required. 2.9 FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL & CABLE A. Fiber optic backbone cabling shall be Indoor/Outdoor 6-Strand Multi -Mode fiber optic cable: Superior Essex # W3006AG01. B. Fiber Optic Patch Cord: LC on both ends. Provide (48) 1 meter, (48) 2 meter, and (24) 3 meter patch cords. Ortronics P1DF series. C. Fiber Optic Patch Panel: Provide rack mounted interconnection unit with space for fibers. Provide panel adapters. All terminations in patch panels LC Type. Ortronics OR-FCO2U-P with OR-OFP-LCD12LC adapter panels. D. Innerduct: All fiber optic cables in plastic innerduct of size required for work or as noted on Drawings. E. Fiber Optic Connectors; LC style connectors shall be reusable. The LC style connectors must be prepolished with low insertion loss. Ortronics # 2051(NT9GA-50T 2.10 WRAPS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide J-hooks, B-Line#BCH64, 4" with BCHR4 retainer clip or Cablofil #CJ64. J-Hooks and cable tray are only acceptable cable supports. B. Tie wraps shall not be used. Provide Ortronics OR-7070084-00 Series Velcro wraps. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.] EQUIPMENT MOUNTING A. All equipment shall be suitable mounted on fire rated terminal backboards, in equipment cabinets or racks, or otherwise suitably solidly supported. Equipment suspended by its cable or connector is unacceptable. Placing of equipment shall be done to insure that it is readily accessible 3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION A. Cable run layouts indicated on the Drawings are generally diagrammatic. Exact routing of conduit and wiring shall be governed by the location of obstructions and building structural conditions. Cable runs shall be in cable trays, raceways, and above ceiling spaces as shown on Drawings. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 B. All fiber cable runs shall have a minimum 20 times the outside diameter bending radius during installation and 10 times the outside diameter post installation. C. All four pair copper cabling shall have a minimum bend radius of 4 times the outside diameter of the cabling. D. Service loops are to be determined by the site manager or the associated drawings. All copper service loops shall be in a figure 8 configuration. 3.3 CABLE SUPPORTS A. Cable shall be in raceway, either surface raceway, conduit, or cable tray or supported at 5' O.C. by J-hooks where open above ceilings. Wrap cable to perform a neat and professional installation. Cable wraps shall be loose to provide no strain on cables. 3.4 CABLE LABELS A. All cables shall be permanently labeled at workstation jack, termination block and host module port to identify terminal location and on both ends of cable. Label designation shall be a continuation of the existing labeling scheme. Example: 1-1-6 = MDF-Patch Panel One -Port 6. Example: 2-1-6 = IDF-Patch Panel One- Port 6. Consult Owner for number sequence prior to submitting shop drawings. 3.5 DATA CABLE ROUTING A. All shall be routed to prevent interference with any systems such as access boxed, ventilation mixing boxes, access hatches to air filters, switch panels, fire alarm equipment, lighting fixtures, etc. The routing must not interfere with any other service or system, operation or maintenance. Raceway shall not be placed in close contact with other devices, electrical or otherwise, that will interfere with its proper operation as a transmitter of data signal. The Contractor will be responsible for rerouting any raceway that is not acceptable to the Architect at no cost. Where surface raceways are used, care shall be taken to route around existing obstacles. Ceilings, wall trim shall be neatly cut to allow installation of surface raceways only as required at permission of the Owner. Cable fill rates must not exceed 75% of the maximum allowable fill to allow for future Moves, Adds and Changes. Bend radius entering and exiting the cable tray and J Hooks must be controlled to not exceed ANSI/TIA recommendations. 3.6 DATA STATION DROPS A. All drop cables shall be installed at locations as indicated on Drawings. Exact outlet location within each room will be as indicated on the Drawings and will deviate from the drawing only by minimal shifting the outlet laterally along the indicated wall. The drop cabling shall be installed without splices from the outlets to the appropriate terminal block. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 5 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 B. All copper and fiber cabling must be installed and terminated using the latest version of ANSI/T1A-568, ANSI/TIA-607-C, ANSI/TIA-569-D and BICSI TDMM Revision 13. 3.7 TESTING A. The Contractor shall test all installed unshielded twisted pair cables, termination to termination to meet ANSI/TIA Category 6 Standards and Ortonics warranty requirements including wire map, length, attenuation, return loss, near end cross talk (NEXT), delay skew, Propagation Delay, PowerSum Near End Cross Talk (PSNEXT) , Equal Level Far End Cross Talk (ELFEXT)and Power Sum equal level far end cross talk (PSELFEXT). B. The end user shall receive the test results via a memory stick. Test results must be delivered in original tester format and pdf with all tests resulting in a PASS. Tests resulting in a marginal pass (*PASS) or Fail will not be acceptable. The end user can also request a printed report for their records. 3.8 COMPANY QUALIFICATIONS A. The bidder shall be regularly engaged in the type of work specified herein. Award will be made only to a bidder who furnished satisfactory evidence that he has the technical ability, experience, equipment, personnel, and financial resources to enable him to successfully and promptly fulfill the requirements and conditions of these specifications. 3.9 FIBER OPTIC CABLE A. Terminations: All strands shall be tenninated and tested. Backboard, terminals, and patch panels shall be professionally configured, including but not limited to, cable cleats, wire harnesses, support rings, etc., and should be dressed and installed to provide a planned layout of the installation. B. Cable: Install in inner duct and rack. Install in the Figure-8 method off the reel prior to pulling. No other practice is permitted. The maximum recommended bending radius shall not be exceeded. The maximum recommended permanent bend after installation shall not be exceeded. C. Pulling locations must utilize a dynamometer. Maximum tensile load shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. Install no LB's on Fiber Optic conduit runs. 3.10 FIBER OPTIC CABLING TESTING A. Test all cable and connections for continuity and repair all defects. Testing must be completed with an Optical Loss Test Set capable of testing 0M3 fiber to the application required by the school district. Total loss budget for any fiber channel shall not exceed 2.6dB. Testing requirements must meet ANSI/TILA-526-14-C. TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 6 AlIt Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 B. O.T.D.R. tests after the LC connectors are installed will be included for all strands and fiber optic power metering testing is required while on reel. Submit all test results to Architect. C. Test per Ortronics and ANS1/TIA-568.D-3 testing requirements. The nCompass warranty requires bi-directional testing using both wavelengths. All testers must show a calibration within the 12 months prior to ensure accuracy. No Fail test results are allowed. The contractor must request a warranty from Ortonics shall be within 30 days of the project completion. Ortronics will issue a Limited Lifetime Static, Dynamic and Application Assurance channel warranty to the end user thru the contractor. END OF SECTION 27 10 00 TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 7 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 'THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM 27 10 00 - 8 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 — GENERAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 A. The general intent of this specification is to provide equipment as required to connect the portable buildings clock/speakers and call switches to the existing Rauland-Borg Telecenter 21 intercommunication system. The system shall remain an integrated system for office and classroom two-way loudspeaking intercommunication, and master clock. B. All major intercommunication system equipment shall be of a single manufacturer, supplied and installed by an authorized factory distributor. The intercommunication system contractor shall have furnished and installed similar intercommunication systems for school applications continuously for no less than five years. C. The intercommunication system contractor shall furnish and install all inaterials, even though not specifically mentioned herein, which are necessary to expand the existing system so that it will perform with no significant change to day-to-day operation. D. To qualify as a bidder, the installation shall be made by a licensed and bonded contractor holding a valid Washington State Electrical Contractor's License and Administrator's Certificate as described in the Electricians and Electrical Installations Revised Code of Washington State. All work covered by this specification is to be performed by a holder of a current State of Washington Specialty Electrician for limited energy systems. E. All major components shall be listed with the Underwriter's Laboratories Re-examination Service. Network -connected telephone equipment shall be listed under UL1459. This documentation is mandatory; all submittals without UL listing information will automatically be rejected. F. The intercommunication system contractor shall guarantee availability of 24-hour local service by factory -trained personnel of the equipment manufacturer. The distributor shall have available stock of the manufacturer's standard parts. G. This specification is based upon the expansion of the existing Telecenter system as manufactured by the Rauland-Borg Corporation and furnished and installed by Electrocom of Lynnwood, Washington. 1. Authorized Rauland-Borg Distributor Contact: Name: Electrocom Address: 6815 216th Street SW Lynnwood, Washington 98036 Phone #: 425-774-6600 Contact: Ben Swerk, extension 154 / Art Howard, extension 150 Email: bswerk@electrocom.us / arth@electrocom.us 27 20 00 — 1 Tukwila School District kw, Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 All major equipment components will be furnished and installed by Electrocom of Lynnwood, Washington. All system infrastructures, including cable and speaker back boxes, will be provided in this bid by Electrocom, and installed by the electrical contractor as part of this bid. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Expand the existing school intercommunication system including dial -up loudspeaking intercom with hands -free answer back, audio program distribution, and master clock class change signaling as specified and as shown on the electrical drawings. B. The existing system consists of the following: an owner -provided telephone system, administrative area telephones, and a contractor -provided intercom controller. Additions to the system will include loudspeakers, call switches, clock/speaker assemblies and all of the associated materials, hardware, and wiring necessary to expand the system as specified and as shown on the electrical drawings. C. The system shall be easy to learn and operate. All standard programming shall be web -based, and user friendly to allow the system administrator the ability to easily program system features. Provide complete and satisfactorily operating district/school communications and district/school safety as described herein using materials and equipment of types, sizes, ratings, and performances as indicated. Use materials and equipment that comply with referenced standards and manufacturers' standard design and construction, in accordance with published product information. Coordinate the features of all materials and equipment so they form an integrated system with components and interconnections matched for optimum performance of specified functions. D. The system shall, at a minimum, consist of an intercommunication system exchange, loudspeakers, and all other materials, hardware, and wiring necessary for a comprehensive and completely installed system. System must also provide emergency announcements to override any other system functions assuring that all Emergency and Lockdown messages are heard at every speaker location. System must have capability of pre -recording emergency announcements that can simply be activated by a soft key or via a dedicated pushbutton station. The system shall also provide atomic time synchronization with class change tones utilizing multiple programmable schedules for each zone from a web -based user interface. E. The system shall maintain statistics of operations of the system functions for use by the individual administering the system. 1.3 FUNCTIONS — COMMUNICATIONS A. The system shall contain software and hardware for integrating an owner -provided digital PBX with the Telecenter classroom intercommunication system, maintaining all features of both systems. The system shall utilize owner -provided office area multi -line display telephones as well as intercom loudspeakers. B. The system shall offer the following features: 27 20 00 2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 1. The intercommunication system shall make provisions for the connection of at least 32 tie lines and up to 512 stations. Initially the system shall be equipped to connect to two tie lines and to all loudspeaker stations. Additional telephone system interface cards, if required for this connection, will be the responsibility of the school district. The system's SIP Interface shall provide audio paging access from any telephone to any speaker, zone (group) or all speakers/paging horns throughout the entire facility. A minimum of 25 separate distinct alarm signals shall be provided. Alain' signals originating from any assigned administrative telephone shall have priority over all regular system functions. SIP interface will provide the ability to initiate a school -wide emergency including lockdown and evacuate sequences. C. The system shall have the ability to utilize a web -browser and a microphone connected to the PC to deliver live emergency paging, pre-recorded messages, and tones from any authorized computer in the school or district. The system must be capable of automatically notifying district personnel via the WAN of an alarm condition. D. The system shall have the ability to automatically broadcast page emergency instructions throughout an entire campus when an alarm (e.g. lockdown, lockout, security, fire) is tripped or manually activated. The emergency instructions are pre-programmed and require no user intervention. The system shall provide redundant alarm annunciation over intercom/paging speakers, and is not meant to replace primary fire alarm or security systems. E. The intercommunication system shall be capable of operating with either loop start or ground start trunks for existing and future compatibility with utility services. Routing of outside lines or tie lines shall be software programmable to provide DID, AAI, DIL, and DISA access through any port. F. The intercommunication system will be capable of directly accessing all the system capabilities from the owner -provided PBX via dedicated tie lines. G. The system shall provide for two-way loudspeaking communications to any selected location equipped with a classroom loudspeaker. H. The system shall provide for the instantaneous distribution of emergency all -call announcements simultaneously to all locations equipped with loudspeakers by dialing a predetermined code number. Emergency announcements originating at any authorized telephone shall have priority over all regular system functions. Provide capability of prerecording emergency announcements that can be activated by a simple soft key or via a dedicated pushbutton station. 1. The system shall provide for the instantaneous distribution of announcements to pre - scheduled groups of speakers from any location equipped with an administrative telephone by dialing a predetermined code number. 1.4 FUNCTIONS — AUDIO PROGRAMMING A. Transmit audio program to any one, several, or all loudspeakers simultaneously. B. Selectively provide audio program to any room station, zone, or all zones. 27 20 00 — 3 Tukwila School School District \ Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 1.5 FUNCTIONS — MASTER CLOCK INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 A. Re -use the existing master clock. The master clock and bell system shall provide the following functions: B. Interface with all types of secondary clocks whether digital or analog synchronous wired or minute -impulse types. This shall be accomplished without the use of external synchronous adapters. C. Correct two different types of secondary clocks simultaneously, analog and digital. D. Accumulation of down time during power outage to reset secondary clocks after the power has been restored. E. Class change tone signaling shall be a part of the intercommunication system, and shall be capable of assigning a speaker to any zone circuits. All circuits will be programmable. PART 2 — EQUIPMENT 2.1 SERVER SOFTWARE A. Server software shall provide district -wide paging, bell event scheduling, emergency notification, and configuration for the entire district. The software shall have the ability to configure and initiate system features, per school and district -wide, via web -based interface. The software shall have the ability to sync system time to the atomic clock signal or to the school's or district's network time server. B. The server software shall provide a web -browser to deliver district -wide emergency paging, pre-recorded messages, and tones from any authorized computer in the facility or district. The software must be capable of automatically notifying district personnel via the WAN of an alarm condition. The software shall automatically broadcast page emergency instructions via associated system hardware throughout an entire district when an alarm (e.g. lockdown, lockout, security, fire) is initiated via the web -based interface. The emergency instructions are pre-programmed, and require no user intervention. The system shall provide redundant alarm annunciation over intercom/paging speakers, and is not meant to replace primary fire alarm or security systems. The software shall have the ability to be installed in cloud, virtual, or physical server environments. C. The web -based user interface shall support secure HTTP browsing. The server software shall support encryption to ensure secure access. The software shall support any combination of VoIP Telecenter campus controllers and Telecenter page modules for a minimum of 1,000 facilities. D. The software shall support a minimum of 50,000 IP speaker modules, district -wide. 27 20 00 — 4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms E. The server software shall be a Rauland model TCU2000SW. 2.2 CAMPUS CONTROLLER TERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 A. The system shall connect to the district -provided telephone network via a SIP connection. SIP interface to a district -provided Telephone Network shall be capable of allowing connected phones to display classroom call -ins, answer internal intercom call -ins, make pages, and change priorities of call -ins in progress. B. The system's SIP interface shall provide: 1. Audio paging access from any telephone to any single intercom speaker, zone group of intercom/paging speakers, or all speakers/paging horns throughout the entire facility. 2. The ability to answer or upgrade a call -in directed to that SIP extension. 3. Single button access from any telephone on the system to initiate alarm signals within the facility to all or select locations equipped with speakers. A minimum of 25 separate distinct alarm signals shall be provided. Alarm signals originating from any assigned administrative telephone shall have priority over all regular system functions. 4. The ability to initiate a school -wide emergency including lockdown and evacuate sequences. C. The campus controller shall give the system the ability to place two levels of call -in from any call in switch. It shall also give the classrooms the ability to "check -in" via push button when they have successfully secured their location during an emergency. D. The campus controller shall store a minimum of 48 hours' worth of bell event schedules, all emergency notification sequences, as well as facility -wide configuration.. E. The system shall have the ability to utilize a web -browser and a microphone connected to the PC to deliver district -wide live emergency paging, pre-recorded messages, and tones from any authorized computer in the facility or the district. The system must be capable of automatically notifying district personnel of an alarm condition via the WAN. F. The system shall have the ability to automatically broadcast page ernergency instructions throughout an entire campus when an alarm (e.g. lockdown, lockout, security, fire) is tripped or manually activated. The emergency instructions are pre-programmed and require no user intervention. The system shall provide redundant alarm annunciation over intercom/paging speakers, and is not meant to replace primary fire alarm or security systems. G. The campus controller shall be a Rauland model TCC2000. 2.3 ADMINISTRATIVE CONSOLE 27 20 00 — 5 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 A. The administrative console shall have a full color screen with four programmable soft touch buttons, three line select buttons, two volume control buttons, a push -to -talk button, speaker phone mode, and left/right and up/down scrolling. B. Audio paging access shall be allowed from any console to any speaker zone (group), or all speakers/paging horns throughout the entire school. C. The system shall provide a single -button to distribute emergency announcements within the facility to all or select locations equipped with speakers. Emergency announcements shall have priority over all regular system functions with the ability to initiate a school -wide emergency including lockdown and evacuate sequences. D. Soft touch buttons on any console on the system shall have the ability to be programmed to initiate alarm signals within the school to all or select locations equipped with speakers. A minimum of 25 separate distinct alarm signals shall be provided. Alarm signals originating from any assigned administrative console shall have priority over all regular system functions. E. Soft touch buttons on the system shall have the ability to be programmed to automatically broadcast page emergency instructions throughout an entire school when an alarm (e.g. lockdown, lockout, security, and fire) is tripped or manually activated. The console shall have up to 64 configurable soft keys. The emergency instructions are pre-programmed and require no user intervention. The system provides redundant alarm annunciation over intercom/paging speakers, and is not meant to replace primary fire alarm or security systems. F. The console shall have the ability to perform intercom functions to any single IP-addressable speaker module. G. Any console shall have programmable soft key access for activating relays campus wide. H. The console shall have the ability to activate bells and provide paging for the local campus in the event of district -wide connection loss. 1. The administrative console shall be a Rauland model TCC2044. Provide quantity as required; minimum one. 2.4 ANALOG GATEWAY A. The analog gateway shall contain all the necessary circuitry to support all critical emergency event notification including emergency check -in, intercom, zone paging, program/music, and event tone distribution. The analog gateway must also support event notification from up to 24 classrooms that utilize 25-volt speakers and current Telecenter call switches for front office notification. B. The analog gateway shall include built-in paging audio amplification of 25 watts total — 5 watts maximum per port. The gateway shall utilize two global audio channels for each gateway. C. The analog gateway shall be a Rauland model TCC2024. Provide quantity as required; minimum one. 27 20 00 6 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM Temporary Portable Classrooms 27 20 00 2.5 IP CLASSROOM MODULE A. The system shall provide multiple IP classroom modules for intercom, paging, and relay activation. The classroom module shall be PoE 802.3af compliant, shall support DHCP, and shall connect to the network with a single RJ45 connector. B. The IP classroom module shall interface to the school's data network, speakers, and multiple call switches. It shall provide a minimum of five levels of call -in to be placed. C. A call -in shall route to a designated administrative console and select SIP connected telephones, and can only be cleared from the system once it is answered. If a call -in is not answered within a pre-programmed time, the call -in may reroute to other telephones and consoles and announce over selected or all speakers. A minimum of five levels of call in can be placed from an IP classroom module. D. An option for privacy call -in switches shall be supported. When the privacy switch is activated, it shall prevent administrative or classroom telephones from monitoring the specific two-way intercom speaker location. E. The IP classroom module shall have the ability to belong to one or more of a minimum of 100 independent zones for zone paging, program/music distribution zones, and class change tone reception; this assignment is a programmable function, changeable by time of day. Each IP classroom module's location shall be programmed in software to belong to any combination of software zones. IP classroom modules shall be designed to mount near ceiling and wall speakers and in the plenum space. F. The IP classroom module shall be a Rauland model TCC2011. Provide quantity as required. 2.6 ZONE PAGING MODULE A. The zone paging module shall be capable of driving an amplifier to extend paging coverage throughout a facility as well as to outdoor playgrounds and sports facilities. B. The zone paging module shall have one RJ45 network data jack, and shall be compatible with existing networks that use the 10-100 Base-T protocols. C. The zone paging module shall be either rack or wall mountable. D. The zone paging module shall be a Rauland model TCC2022. Provide quantity as required. 2.7 AUXILIARY INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE A. The auxiliary input/output module shall have two input contacts and two output contacts which shall be individually addressable. B. The auxiliary input/output module shall allow activation of emergencies and sequences via a panic button. It shall be able to control external devices such as alert/strobe lights. 27 20 00 — 7 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms (6' INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 C. The module shall be user -programmable to be activated manually, through an event/bell schedule, and during emergency notification. D. The auxiliary input/output module shall be wall or rack -mountable. E. The auxiliary input/output module shall be a Rauland model TCC2033. Provide quantity as required. 2.8 PROGRAM LINE INPUT MODULE A, The program line input module shall encode analog audio signals to digital, IP-based data and shall accept stereo or mono line level audio. The module shall be compliant with IEEE 802.3af PoE standards. B. The program line input module shall be equipped with one 3.5mm input socket, and one RJ45 network socket. A male 3.5mm to dual male RCA connector cable shall be provided with the module. C. The program line input module shall be a Rauland model TCC2055. Provide one. 2,9 DUAL PUSH BUTTON RJ45 CALL SWITCH A. The dual push button RJ45 call switch shall have one "normal" button that activates a distinctive call level by momentarily depressing the button. The button shall be grey in color, and shall be clearly marked "NORM" to the right of the button. The button will route the call -in to any administrative console for quick and easy response. B. The call switch shall also have one "emergency" button that shall activate a distinctive call level by momentarily depressing the button. The button shall be red in color, and shall be clearly marked "EMER" to the right of the button. The button will route the call -in to any administrative console for quick and easy response. C. The station shall have a built-in RJ45 jack for connection to Cat5e/6 classroom cabling, D. The dual push button RJ45 call switch shall be a Rauland model 603302. Provide quantity as shown on the drawings. 2.10 EQUIPMENT RACK (EXISTING) A. Re -use the existing equipment rack. 2.11 AUDIO PROGRAM CONTROL UNIT (EXISTING) A. The audio program control unit shall be designed for absolute simplicity of operation. 27 20 00 — 8 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms NTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 B. The audio program control unit shall include a complete program system providing a minimum of three program sources. A monitor panel equipped with level control and audio monitoring facilities shall be provided. C. The audio program control unit will provide remote control of all functions via an infrared remote control. The output will be routed to a music channel for distribution throughout the school. D. Re -use the existing audio program control unit. 2.12 ATOMIC TIME SYNCHRONIZATION MODULE A. The atomic time synchronization module shall provide network time synchronization throughout the facility as well as automatic Daylight Saving Time correction. The atomic time Synchronization module shall use an Ethernet connection to the internet to synchronize its time with the Atomic Time from the National Institute of Standards and Time. B. The atomic time synchronization module shall be rack -mounted, and shall have a 6-digit front panel display. C. The atomic time synchronization module shall be a Telecenter module TCAMCS with a model TCAMCSRMK rack -mount kit. Provide one of each. 2.13 CLOCK POWER SUPPLY A. The clock power supply shall provide 24 VAC power for all analog and digital secondary clocks requiring a 24VAC power supply. The clock power supply shall be able to provide power and correct up to 12 digital secondary clocks or up to 200 analog clocks on each output. B. The clock power supply shall have two 24 VAC outputs providing 3.5 amps each, and power input of 120 VAC, 60 Hz, 1.5 Amps. C. The clock power supply shall be a Rauland model 2515. 2.14 CLOCK INTERFACE MODULE A. The clock interface module shall provide a direct interface between the intercom system, master clock, secondary clocks, and network time synchronization. It shall supply the clock correction signals to synchronize them to an atomic tine server. B. The clock interface module shall draw a maximum of 500 mA from a 5.0 VDC supply with all relays enrergized. 27 20 00 — 9 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 C. The clock interface module shall be a Rauland model TCCKINFM. 2.15 AUDIO PROGRAM AND PAGE POWER AMPLIFIER (EXISTING) A. Re -use existing audio program and page power amplifier. 2.16 CEILING -MOUNTED ROUND SPEAKER ASSEMBLY A. The round speaker assembly shall be a complete UL listed, fire -protective signaling device with an 8" speaker with 10-ounce magnet and SW-25V jumper -select transformer, a round, screw -mount baffle, and a round steel back box. The baffle and back box shall have a white powder coat finish. B. The ceiling -mounted round speaker assembly shall be a Quam model UL-8. 2.17 SPEAKER/TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY A. The loudspeaker shall be 8" in diameter with a 5-ounce magnet and a dual cone. The loudspeaker shall have a power rating of 15 watts at 8 C2, and nominal coverage of 100°. Calculated output shall be 99 dB SPL, 5 watts at 1 meter. B. The transformer shall provide 5 watts at 25/70 volts. C. The speaker/transformer assembly shall be a Quam model 8C5PAX/TBLU. 2.18 WALL -MOUNTED SQUARE GRILLE AND FLUSH BACK BOX A. The square grille shall be constructed of one-piece, heavy gauge cold rolled steel with a square loudspeaker cutout and perforated grille. The grille shall be 12-5/8" square, and shall be finished in textured white epoxy with a black loudspeaker sub -plate. B. The wall -mounted square grille shall be an AtlasSound model 164-8A. C. The flush back box shall be formed from a single piece of 20-gauge steel, and shall be 11.75" square by 4" deep. The back box shall feature combination knockouts on four sides, and include a fire -retardant foam pad on a section of the base to help absorb speaker resonance. The back box shall have a black powder epoxy finish. D. The flush back box shall be a Lowell model RE1175. 2.19 WEATHERPROOF LOUDSPEAKER AND TRANSFORMER A. The weatherproof loudspeaker shall be 8" in diameter with a 10-ounce magnet. It shall have a phenolic resin impregnated, moisture resistant cone. 27 20 00 — 10 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms INTERCO CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 B. The loudspeaker shall have a power rating of 20 watts, and nominal coverage of 100°. Calculated output shall be 101 dB SPL, 5 watts at 1 meter. C. The weatherproof loudspeaker shall be a Quam model 8C1OPAOT. D. The transformer shall provide 5 watts at 25/70.7 volts with five taps at -3 dB levels. E. The transformer shall be a Quam model TBLU. 2.20 VANDAL -PROOF GRILLE AND BACK BOXES A. The vandal -proof grille shall be manufactured from self -aging aluminum alloy which has a tensile strength of 44,000 psi. The grille shall have a perforated 22-gauge cold rolled steel stud -mounting loudspeaker plate. Flush -mounting tamperproof heat -treated alloy screws and a special wrench shall be furnished. The grille shall be finished in textured white epoxy. B. The vandal -proof grille shall be an AtlasSound model VP161A-R8. C. The flush speaker back box shall be welded of cold rolled steel construction, and be undercoated to eliminate mechanical and acoustical resonances. The back box shall be painted black. D. The flush back box shall be an AtlasSound model 193-8. E. The surface speaker back box shall be constructed of heavy-duty 16-gauge cold rolled steel, and be finished in a textured white epoxy. F. The surface speaker back box shall be an AtlasSound model SE161-R. 2.21 DIGITAL SECONDARY CLOCK MODULE A. The digital secondary clock module shall have a full 1.8" high red LED numeral display. Automatic correction shall be provided every 24 hours, after a power failure, or whenever time is changed on the master clock. The clock shall operate from 24/120 volts AC, 50 to 600 Hz. B. The digital secondary clock module shall be a Sapling EBD-31F-254-4-R 2.22 DIGITAL CLOCK/SPEAKER GRILLE AND ENCLOSURES A. The digital clock/speaker grille shall be formed from 18-gauge steel, and measure 12.688" square. It shall feature a faceplate with painted black finish, a square perforated area with welded studs for mounting an 8" speaker, and a cutout for mounting a digital clock module. B. The digital clock/speaker grille shall be a Lowell model DC802-DR1. 27 20 00 — 11 Tukwila School District.,. Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 C. Where flush mounted, the grille shall be mounted to a back box which shall be formed from a single piece of 20-gauge steel, and shall be 11.75" square by 4" deep. The back box shall feature combination knockouts on four sides, and include a fire -retardant foam pad on a section of the base to help absorb speaker resonance. The back box shall have a black powder epoxy finish. D. The flush mount back box shall be a Lowell model RE1175. E. Where surface mounted, the grille shall be mounted to a back box which shall be fabricated of 20-gauge steel. It shall measure 12.75" square by 4" deep. The surface -mount back box shall include a universal hole pattern on the rear for installation to a 4" square, 4" octagon, 1-gang, or 2-gang E.O. box, and shall have a 3.8" diameter hole with grommet for wire access. The back box shall include a fire -retardant foam pad on the inside to help absorb speaker resonance. The back box shall be finished in a white powder epoxy. The surface mounted back box shall be a Lowell model SE1275. 2.23 13" ANALOG SECONDARY CLOCK A. The 13" analog secondary clock shall have a high -durability ABS enclosure, and a shatter - resistant polycarbonate lens. The diameter of the clock face shall be no less than 12" in diameter. The clock shall provide indication of improper electrical connection and/or lack of time synchronization signal. B. The 13" analog secondary clock shall be a Rauland model WAC13S. 2.24 ANALOG CLOCK/SPEAKER GRILLE WITH LOUDSPEAKER A. The analog clock/speaker grille shall be constructed of 20-gauge cold -rolled steel, and be finished in baked cool gray epoxy. The grille shall measure 20.40" high by 14.4" wide by 0.5" deep. B. The grille shall include an 8" loudspeaker which shall be of the permanent magnet seamless cone type, with an additional cone to extend high frequency response. The loudspeaker shall have a frequency range of 65 Hz to 17 kHz, a power rating of 8 watts RMS, and a sensitivity of 93 dB at 1 meter with 1 watt input. C. The analog clock/speaker grille with loudspeaker shall be a Rauland model ACCSACX. 2.25 FLUSH BACK BOX FOR ANALOG CLOCK/SPEAKER GRILLE A. The flush back box shall be constructed of 20-gauge cold rolled steel, and shall be finished in baked powdered cool gray epoxy. The back box shall measure 18.5" high by 10.75" wide by 3.75" deep. The back box shall support either vertical or horizontal mounting. B. The flush back box shall be a Rauland model ACC1121. 272000-12 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 2.26 SURFACE BACK BOX FOR ANALOG CLOCK/SPEAKER GRILLE A. The flush back box shall be constructed of 20-gauge cold rolled steel, and shall be finished in baked powdered cool gray epoxy. The back box shall measure 20.2" high by 14.3" wide by 2.8" deep. The back box shall support either vertical or horizontal mounting. B. The surface back box shall be a Rauland model ACC1120. 2.27 16" ANALOG SECONDARY CLOCK A. The 16" analog secondary clock shall have a high -durability ABS enclosure, and a shatter - resistant polycarbonate lens. The diameter of the clock face shall be no less than 14-7/8" in diameter so the numbers can be seen in large areas such as gymnasiums and other common areas. The clock shall provide indication of improper electrical connection and/or lack of time synchronization signal. B. The 16" analog secondary clock shall be a Rauland model WAC16L 2.28 WIRE GUARD A. The wire guard shall be constructed of 7-gauge steel wire, welded at all points, and finished in nickel plating with lacquer coating. It shall be provided with two welded hinges and a mounting plate. The wire guard shall have an inside diameter of 18" by 18" by 7" deep. B. The wire guard shall be a Chase model CSGW-18187. 2.29 INTERCOM PRIORITY MODULE A. An intercom priority module shall be provided to mute the audio systems in various rooms in the school when the intercom speakers are being used for announcements and class change tones. The module will automatically mute the sound reinforcement systems while the intercom speakers are in use, and disengage when the intercom speakers are no longer in use. B. The intercom priority module shall be a Rauland model TCSPPR. Provide one intercom priority module for each area that has either a classroom sound reinforcement system or other sound reinforcement system. 2.30 EXTERIOR BELL AND ENCLOSURE A. The exterior bell shall produce a long, continuous ringing sound as long as current is supplied. The bell shall have a voltage raring of 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz, and current rating of 0.350 Amps. It shall have a sound rating of 106 dB at 1 meter, 96 dB at 10 feet. Bell signaling shall be controlled by the master clock via a low voltage circuit. The bell shall measure 10.5" in diameter and shall be 4-13/16" deep, and the gong size shall be 10". The bell shall be mounted in a weatherproof cast housing. 27 20 00 — 13 Tukwila School District,. Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 B. The enclosure shall have a molded neoprene gasket for firm holding, and shall be weatherproof. It shall be made of aluminum and shall have a sage gray enamel finish which protects the bell from corrosion. The enclosure shall measure 6.5" in diameter and 1-7/8" deep. C. The exterior bell shall be an Edwards model 340-10G5 with an Edwards model 349 enclosure. 2.31 MATERIALS NOT INCLUDED — PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS A. Switchers, routers, network hubs, network cable, data concentrators, and other similar active electronic equipment for data network telecommunications. B. Computers, printers, modems, and other similar utilization equipment. C. Telephone system, telephone switching equipment, and related appurtenances. D. All server hardware and SQL software. PART 3 — INSTALLATION 3.1 CABLE AND TERMINAL CABINET A Intercom station cable shall be one pair #22 gauge solid conductors with an overall foil shield and three pair #22 gauge all within an overall jacket to match existing. B. All Category cable shall be provided, installed, tested, and terminated by the data contractor. 1. Note: The above cabling shall be spliced in junction boxes, device boxes, or terminal cabinets. In -line splices are not permitted. C. Wiring shall be identified by room number, segregated, neatly laced, and terminated on telephone -type punch -on blocks. Cabling between control center console and the main junction box shall be provided with multi -pair cable to allow ease in console connections, disconnections, and service. D. Prior to connection of any terminal equipment all cables shall be tested for opens, splits, crossed pairs, shorts to ground, and shield continuity. All defective cabling is to be replaced prior to device hook-up. E. Except were specifically indicated otherwise, all exposed non -current carrying metallic parts of the communications system shall be grounded. If the building power ground is used, a separate ground conductor shall be used from the equipment to the grounding grid. All grounding shall be done with solid copper wire or larger. The contractor shall use every effort to insure system stability and safety. 3.2 INSTRUCTION AND MANUALS A. A minimum of eight hours of time shall be included in the bid for instruction of the personnel designated by the owner as to the correct operation of the system. 272000-14 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 B. Upon completion of the installation, the contractor shall furnish the owner with one digital system operation manual. C. Updated operational guidelines shall be given in written form in sufficient numbers so that all key personnel have operational instructions of programming, station use, and special features. Copies of these instructions shall be provided for permanent record in the operation manuals, 3.3 WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE A. A manufacturer's five-year warranty covering all new Rauland components and equipment shall be provided, and documentation from the manufacturer shall be submitted with system documentation. A five-year contractor warranty covering all installation shall also be provided. The warranty period shall begin on the system's first use by the school. B. Should any trouble develop within this warranty period due to inferior or faulty material and/or workmanship, the contractor shall promptly make all required corrections without cost to the owner. END OF SECTION 27 20 00 27 20 00 15 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms INTERCOM CLOCK SYSTEM 27 20 00 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 27 20 00 - 16 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 A. Provide coordination and details to support conduit and raceway installation specified under Section 26 05 33. 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections apply to work of this section. B. Section 27 10 00 and associated electrical, power and grounding requirements. 1.2 SUMMARY A. The systems shall be called the "Classroom Audio / Video System" and the installer, the "AN System Installer". System equipment and installation including but not limited to: 1. Audio Mixers, Equalizers, Amplifiers, and other signal processing equipment. 2. Loudspeakers, enclosures and speaker mounting or support hardware including speaker mounting frames and incidental steel support members. 3. Equipment Racks (Custom fabricated as required), Portable Carts. 4. Projectors (OFCI), Projector Mounts. 5. Cables, connectors, Custom interface plates and wiring. B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Contract: 1. Projectors and other program sources C. Products Provided and Installed by the Owner 1. Computers 2. Document Camera 3. White Board 1.3 REFERENCES: A. Sound System Engineering (2nd Edition), Davis and Davis, Howard W. Sams 1987. B. Audio System - Design and Installation, Giddings, Howard W. Sams, 1990. C. ANSI S4.46-1992. D. EIA Standard AS-160. E. EIA Standard RS-219. 27 21 72 - 1 /1 'N. Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms F. EIA Standard RS-460. 1.4 QUALIFICATIONS CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 A. All Audio / Video system equipment shall be supplied and installed by an authorized factory distributor. In order to keep continuity in all systems the Classroom A/V Distribution system shall be provided and install by the same contractor as the Intercom and Clock system provider. B. The system shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date of acceptance or first beneficial use, whichever is first, against defects in materials, workmanship, design and improper adjustment. Any defects in the system shall be corrected at no expense to the Owner, provided the system does not show signs of abuse. During the guarantee period, any work found not to be in conformance with the plans, specifications and addenda shall be brought into conformity with same at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Approval request for installation of equipment not as specified herein must be received by the architect not less than ten days prior to bid opening. Proposals must be accompanied by complete technical data including: Equipment list on contractors letterhead listing major system components, such as loudspeakers, amplifying and control equipment including mixers, equalizers, signal processors, matching transformers, equipment housings, ancillary equipment, microphones, cabling etc. Compilation of manufacturers catalogs or specification sheets of major components and block diagrams. It is the sole responsibility of the contractor to prove equality to the satisfaction of the engineer including, laboratory test data, fabrication techniques, installation and testing procedures. Potential bidders submitting proposals for prior approval must provide, upon request, a working demonstration system for the Owner's inspection prior to final acceptance to insure that the submitted components are equal to the specified in all functional aspects. Equipment that is submitted for consideration must have been installed and operating satisfactorily in at least two independent School locations within a 50 mile radius of this location. D. Alternative proposals, which are approved, will be published by addenda. Proposals not complying with the prior approval requirements and conditions set forth will not be considered. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Computer Design: Provide computer aided design drawings and documentation clearly indicating proposed design. At a minimum the documentation shall show mounting and coverage of the speakers, wallplate design showing labeling and graphical depiction of each component / jack in addition to a functional system one -line drawing. All computer line drawings shall be printed using a pen / inkjet plotter or laser printer for clarity. B. Provide clearly identified, complete catalog cuts of all major components including but not limited to: 1. Head end equipment, including mixers, amplifiers, switchers, signal processors, etc. 2. Loudspeakers including; baffles, special mounting enclosures, crossovers, matching networks and protection circuits. 27 21 72 2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 3. Equipment cabinets and enclosures 4. Trim and interface plate fabrication details. 5. Backboxes and specialty rough -ins 6. Wire and cable CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 C. Provide shop drawings showing engineering details of equipment interconnection including point to point wiring, switching con -figurations, matching networks and pads, rack elevations and equipment layout, speakers with proposed mounting and aiming. Proposed wire routing, rough -in and installation information. 1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Provide 3 complete bound O&M manuals describing maintenance and operation of the system. Include descriptions and service data on all component parts. Manual shall also include the following. 1. Warranty statement indicating effective dates. 2. Complete engineering data on all systems furnished including point to point wiring diagrams of the system in its "as built condition. 3 Step by step instructions on operational procedures, including power up and power down sequences, special operational guidelines and standard preventative maintenance procedures. 1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Provide complete and functioning Audio / Video distribution system for each Classroom and other rooms per these specifications and as shown on the drawings. The Audio system will be complete and fully functional, clearly audible and absent of any unwanted clicks, hisses or noise. The Video system shall provide industry standard signal strength from the input location to the projector over CATS/6 cabling. The system shall be modular in design and shall provide simplified distribution of all audio and video signals through the use of CATS/6 cable. Any system not using CAT 5/6 cable for audio and video distribution will not be accepted. AV Contractor shall be responsible for providing and determining the proper mounting location for the projector mount to ensure that the picture is sized appropriate for each viewing location. 1.8 PRODUCTS A. Classroom Amplification: 1. The Classroom Amplification shall be mounted as shown on the contract drawings. The four channel Audio Video switcher shall be dedicated for the control of all program sources including but not limited to audio and video from the following: a. Computer b. Projector c. Auxiliary input source d. Infrared Microphone 2. The output of the Amplification System shall be connected to foul flush / lay -in ceiling mounted speakers or two surface mounted speakers as shown on the contract drawings. In 27 21 72 - 3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 addition a 1/4 " "Speaker Output" jack shall be flush mounted adjacent to the input panel located at the primary Teachers desk location. 3. Frontrow Pro Digital B. Classroom Audio / Video Interface Panel(s) 1. The Classroom Audio / Video interface panel(s) shall be mounted with the Audio / Video equipment as shown on the contract drawings. It shall provide for the input of one (1) VGA signals, one (1) HDMI and two (2) 3.5mm audio inputs. Extron DTP UWP 4K 232 D 2. The Classroom Audio / Video Interface panel shall provide all Audio and Video signal balancing and isolation to prevent any superfluous noise or signal. 3. The Classroom Audio / Video interface panel shall be connected to the Classroom Video Receiver utilizing CAT 5/6 shielded twisted pair cable. Extron XTP DTP 24 C. Classroom Audio / Video Receiver 1. The Classroom Audio / Video Receiver shall be located at the Projector as shown on the contract drawings. 2. The Receiver shall provide for the conversion of the twisted pair signal to a standard HDMI video output. 3. The Classroom Audio / Video Receiver shall be connected to the Classroom Audio / Video Wallplate utilizing CAT 5/6 shielded twisted pair cable. 4. Extron. DTP HDMI 4K 230 Rx / XTP DTP 24 D. Classroom Speakers 1. The Classroom Speakers shall be a complete loudspeaker assembly, including backbox, and be designed for classrooms with drop -ceilings. 2. The Classroom speaker shall be semi flush mounted — full range speaker system to provide clear and natural sound. 3. Speakers shall be mounted in the ceiling tile grid and be provided with all mounting and support hardware to avoid any sagging of the ceiling tile. 4. The Speakers shall be installed to provide equal and even distribution of sound as shown on the contract drawings. 5. Frontrow Speaker Package ( provide 4 ceiling mounted / 2 wall mounted) E. Projector Mounting 1. The Classroom AN Contractor shall provide labor and material to mount the owner provided projector in the owner provided projector mount. 2. The Classroom AN Contractor shall provide all required interface cables in addition to ensuring proper alignment of projector to the viewing area. 3. Extend the Audio output from the Projector to the Audio Distribution system amplifier. F. Teachers Microphone 1. The Classroom Audio Distribution system shall include one infrared based microphone system. 2. The microphone system shall integrate seamlessly with the Classroom Audio Distribution system. 2721 72-4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 3 The system shall include the following: a. Teachers Microphone and Transmitter b. Remote IR Sensor c. Receiver 4. The Remote IR Sensor shall be mounted on the ceiling as shown on the contract drawings. 5. The Receiver shall interface with the audio input panel. 6. The infrared microphone system shall be equal in performance to: 7. Frontrow 940TM / 950CS G. Cable 1. Both plenum rated and pvc jacketed cable shall be acceptable. It shall be the responsibility of the Audio / Video Contractor to determine the proper type cable to be used. All cable installation shall meet the applicable Building and Electrical code standards. The following is an approved list of cable to be utilized on this project: a. Audio / Video / Control Cable from wallplates to video switcher: CAT 5 /6 STP: Belden, Liberty, West Penn, Essex, General, ComScope b. Speaker and ADA transmitter jack 18awg 2 conductor: Belden, Liberty, West Penn c. A/V Contractor to provide industry standard interface cables from switcher to projector in lengths as required H. Special Equipment 1. In an effort to minimize the impact on the construction schedule of this project and facilitate the timely opening of this School it is strongly recommended that the successful A/V Contractor have the following support equipment, or equipment equal to the following, on its premise: a. Techno CNC RG Series 5950 CNC machine b. Universal Laser Systems 18"x24" with 2.0 Head Laser Engraver 1) This equipment will provide the owner with a more efficient turn around time should a wallplate configuration need to be changed or custom configured. Although not required, the owner reserves the right to give special consideration A/V Contractor's who have this equipment on their premise. 1.9 EXECUTION A. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid causing delays in construction schedule. B. Mount equipment and enclosures plumb and square. Permanently installed equipment shall be firmly and safely held in place. Design equipment supports to support loads imposed with a safety factor of at least three (five to one for loudspeaker mountings). C. Cover edges of cable pass -through holes in chassis, racks, boxes, etc., with rubber grommets or Brady GRNY nylon grommet. D. Speakers mounting in acoustical tile ceilings to be properly supported with tile bridges or other similar structural bracing. E. AC Power and Grounding (Provided and installed by others) 27 21 72 5 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms s." CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 Equipment Racks. 1. Mount equipment in racks and consoles and fully wire and test before delivery to job site. If field conditions prevent prior assembly of racks, notify Owner in writing that racks will be fabricated on site and the reasons for the change. 2. Provide ventilation adequate to keep temperature within the rack below 100 degrees Fahrenheit. Provide whisper type ventilation fan in each rack if temperature in rack rises above 100 degrees with power on for five continuous hours. 3. Looking at the rack from the rear, locate AC power, digital control, DC control, and speaker wiring on the left; microphone, line level audio, and video wiring on the right. Panels or equipment mounted on the rear rack rails shall not block access to any front mounted components. System Wiring 1. Take precautions to prevent and guard against electromagnetic and electrostatic hum. For line level audio signals, float cable shields at the output of source device. Shields not connected to be folded back over cable jacket and covered with heat -shrink tubing. Do not cut off unused shields. 2. Exercise care in wiring: damaged cables or equipment will not be accepted. Isolate cables of different signals or different levels; and separate, organize, and route to restrict channel crosstalk or feedback oscillation in any amplifier section. Lace wiring and separate into groups for microphone and line level circuits, loudspeaker circuits, and power circuits. 3. Make connections with rosin -core solder or with mechanical connectors approved by the Owner. Where spade lugs are used, crimp properly with ratchet type tool. Spade lugs mounted on 22 gauge or smaller cable to be soldered after crimping. 4. Route unbroken microphone, audio line, and control wiring from receptacle plate/chassis to Mixer / Amplifier. Remove spliced cables and replace without additional charge to the Owner. Connect cable to active components through screw terminal connections and spade lugs whenever available. 5. Make connections to speaker transformers with properly sized closed end connectors crimped with factory approved ratchet type tool. Wire nut or "Scotchlock" connectors are not acceptable. Do not wrap audio cable splices or connections with adhesive backed tape. 6. Execute wiring in strict adherence to "standard broadcast practices," as excerpted from "Recommended Wiring Practices," Broadcast Audio Equipment for AM, FM, Television (5th Edition), Radio Corporation of America (RCA), Camden, N.J. 1962, and Appendix II, "Recommended Wiring Practices", Sound System Engineering, (2nd Edition), D. Davis, and performed in accordance with standard professional practice. 7. Run vertical wiring inside rack in properly sized plastic raceway with snap -on covers (Panduit Type E series). Mount raceways on full length 3/4 inch plywood backboards attached to rack sides. Horizontal wiring in rack to be neatly tied in manageable bundles with cable lengths cut to minimize excess cable slack but still allow for service and testing. Provide horizontal support bars if cable bundles sag. Neatly bundle excess AC power cable from rack mounted equipment with plastic cable ties. Rack wiring to be bundled with plastic cable ties or lacing twine. Electrical tape and adhesive backed cable tie anchors are not acceptable. 8. Connect loudspeakers electrically in phase, using the same wire color code for speaker wiring throughout the project. 27 21 72 - 6 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms eagiN CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 2l 72 9. Wiring and connections shall be completely visible and labeled in rack. Termination resistors shall be 1/2 watt 5 per cent tolerance; fully visible and not concealed within equipment or connectors. Equipment and Cable Labeling. 1. Provide engraved lamicoid labels on the front and rear of active equipment mounted in racks. Mount labels in a neat, plumb and permanent manner. Embossed labels or P-Touch type labels are not acceptable. Equipment labels to have at least three lines of engraving with the first line listing the general name of the device, i.e., POWER AMPLIFIER or EQUALIZER The second line to include the schematic reference of the device, i.e., PA- 1 A or MIXER-3. The bottom line to indicate what other devices or areas this equipment controls, i.e., FEEDS HF-3&4 or FEEDS XOVER-3. 2, Provide an engraved label over each user -operated control that describes the function or purpose of the control. Label size to be adjusted to fit available space. Engraved labels to have 1/8 inch high characters typical. Labels to be black with white characters except where indicated. Embossed or P-Touch type labels are not acceptable 3. Cables and wiring to be logically, legibly and permanently labeled for easy identification. Labels on cables to be adhesive strip type covered with clear heat -shrink tubing. Factory stamped heat shrink tubing may be used in lieu of the adhesive strip style label. Hand- written labels not acceptable. 4. Wiring designations to be an alpha -numeric code that is unique for each cable. Locate the cable designation at the start and end of each cable run and within 3 inches of the point of termination or connection. For cable runs that have intermediate splice points at riser junction boxes, the cable shall have the same designation throughout with an additional suffix to indicate each segment of the run. Actual cable designation assignments to be determined by Contractor. 5. Add cable designation codes to system schematic drawings included with Project Record Drawings. 6. Label each terminal strip with a unique identification code in addition to a numerical label (Cinch MS series) for each terminal. Show terminal strip codes on system schematic drawings included with Project Record Drawings. 7. Provide adhesive labels on the rear of equipment where cables attach to indicate the designation of the cable connected at that point. PART 2 - CONTRACTOR'S TESTS, SETUPS AND ADJUSTMENTS A. Verify the following before beginning actual tests and adjustments on the system: 1. Electronic devices are properly grounded. 2. Powered devices have AC power from the proper circuit and hot, neutral, and ground conductors are connected correctly. 3. Insulation and shrink tubing are present where required. 4. Dust, debris, solder splatter, etc. is removed. S. Cable is dressed, routed, and labeled; connections are consistent with regard to polarity. B. Grounding System Tests: 1. Measure and record the DC resistance between the technical ground in any equipment rack or console and the main building ground. Resistance should be at least 0.15 ohms or less. 27 21 72 - 7 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 2. Temporarily lift the technical ground from the main electrical ground, measure and record the DC resistance between them. Resistance should be at least 1000 ohms. 2.1 CONTRACTOR TESTING A. Prior to energizing or testing the system, ensure the following: 1. All products is installed in a proper and safe manner par the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Insulation and shrink tubing are present where required. 3. Dust, debris, solder splatter, etc. is removed. 4. Cable is dressed, routed, and labeled; connections are consistent with regard to polarity. 5. All labeling has been provided. 6. Temporary facilities and utilities have been properly disconnected, removed and disposed off -site. 7. All products are neat, clean and unmarred and parts securely attached. 8. All broken work, including glass, raised flooring and supports, ceiling tiles and supports, walls, doors, etc. have been replaced or properly repaired, and debris cleaned up and discarded. 9. Electronic devices are properly grounded. B. Prior to energizing the system, perform the following tests in compliance with applicable EIA standards. Provide a draft copy of a proposed test report form for review as part of the submittal process. Record the results of each test in the Project Record Manual and have a cow available for the Owner during inspection. 1. Test each AC power receptacle with a circuit checker to; proper hot, neutral and ground connections. 2. Measure and record the DC resistance between the technical ground in any equipment rack or console and the main building ground. Resistance should be 0.15 ohms or less. 3. Temporarily lift the technical ground from the main electrical ground, measure and record the DC resistance between them. Resistance should be 1000 ohms or greater. 4. Measure the impedance of each speaker line leaving the equipment racks. For full range devices, use a frequency of 1000 Hz, for band limited devices; use a frequency appropriate for the operating range of the transducer. When documenting the results of these tests, include the calculated impedances based on number of units on a line and the size and distance of the run. Correct any field readings that differ more than 20 per cent from the calculated impedances. C. Speaker Circuit Verification Test 1. Provide a low level, distinctive test tone to each amplifier input. 2. Turn on one channel of Amplifier #1 and verify that the correct speaker or group of speakers is operating. Correct any wiring or other problems found. 3. In a similar manner, check each channel of all remaining amplifiers and their respective speaker circuits. 4. Include the results of the tests in the Project Record Manual. D. Volt Speaker Test 1. Play music, pink noise or other distinctive audio signal through each group of 70 volt speakers. Only one amplifier channel should be on at a time. Confirm stereo operation as needed. 272172-8 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms \Nov' CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 2. Walk the area covered by the speakers. 3. Verify that each speaker is operating and that there are no significant changes in volume level from one speaker to the next. 4. Verify that the extent of coverage is consistent with the areas indicated on the drawings. E. Speaker Polarity Verification Test 1. Use an electronic polarity checker, TEF machine, JBL SMAART PRO, SIM II, or other similar device to test each reinforcement speaker. Al] speakers should have the same relative polarity. 2. Follow manufacturer's recommendations in conducting the tests. 3. In a similar manner, check all distributed speakers to ensure they have the same polarity. 4. Include the results of the tests in the Project Record Manual. F. System Gain Adjustment 1. Adjust each active device to have unity gain from the console output to the input of the crossover. 2. With all amplifiers turned off, connect a sine wave or pink noise generator to the input of the console. Using a RMS AC voltmeter with a dB scale, adjust the console to an output between -10 and OdBu. Once the level has been established. it should remain unchanged throughout the test. All equalizers should be set flat for this test. 3. Follow the signal flow from the console to each subsequent component. Measure the input level and output level of each device at the point of connection to the device. The input level reading should differ no more than 0.25 dB from the level recorded for the preceding device. Diagnose and correct the wiring or equipment when any readings that exceed this range. 4. Adjust the output of each component to match the reference level coming from the console. Output level should differ no more than 0.5 db from the console output level. 5. Record the output levels of each device on the Project Record Drawings. G. Amplifier Level Adjustment - Main Reinforcement System 1. Adjust the gain of each amplifier to provide a consistent and appropriate volume level throughout the facility. 2. Begin by connecting a pink noise source to one input of the mixing console. Adjust the console output to -10 dB on the VU meter. 3 Using main reinforcement speakers, adjust the appropriate amplifiers to achieve 85 dBA in the area covered by the speakers. Use a calibrated sound level meter to make the measurement. Amplifiers should be set to provide an average of 85 dBA + 1.5 dB throughout each seating section. Coverage at 4 kHz should be no more than +/- 3 dB. 4. Record the setting of each amplifier in the Project Record Manual and keep backup copies of the data file on disk. 5. After setting the amplifier level for each system, play a pink noise signal over the speakers and walk through each area. Using a sound level meter, identify any areas where the SPL changes by more than 3 dB. 27 21 72 - 9 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 2.2 TEST EQUIPMENT CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 A. Provide the following equipment on site for final acceptance testing. Test equipment to be available for the entire period through final system acceptance unless noted. Prior to start of testing, provide a list to the Owner of test equipment make and model numbers that will be used. 1. Dual -trace oscilloscope - 100 MHz bandwidth, 1 mV/cm sensitivity. 2. Sound Level Meter: ANSI S1.4-1971 Type SIA with digital or analog display. Meter to provide ranges of 40 to 120 dBA. 3 Pink Noise Source - Equal energy per octave bandwidth 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz, —1 dB (long- term average) at 0 dBm output. 4. Impedance Meter _ Capable of testing audio lines at three frequencies, minimum, between 250 Hz and 4k Hz. Measurement Range: 1 ohm to 100 k ohms. 5. Multimeter - Measurement range, DC to 20k Hz, 100 mV to 300 V.10 mA to 10 A. 6. Audio Oscillator: bandwidth 20 Hz to 20k Hz + 1 dB at 0 dBm output. Output to be balanced. Oscillator to include adjustable output level. 7. Ladders and scaffolding necessary to inspect ceiling mounted equipment, speakers or clusters. B. The following procedures will be performed by the Consultant on each System: 1. Audio fidelity test: drive the system with pink noise and measure the frequency response in each 1/3 octave band from 40 Hz to 16k Hz. Use 1/6 Octave, 1/3 octave, or parametric filters to adjust the response of the system(s) to fit the requirements of the space. 2. Control functions shall be checked for proper operation, from controlling devices to controlled devices. 3 Video systems shall be checked for proper operation and visual quality. All video displays shall be free of hum, distortion and detrimental artifacts. 4. Adjust, balance, and align equipment for optimum quality and to meet the manufacturers published specifications. Establish and mark normal settings for each level control, and record these settings, in the "System Operation and Maintenance Manual". 5. Installed and loose equipment will be inventoried for correct quantity. 6. Any other test on any piece of equipment or system deemed appropriate. E. In the event the need for further adjustment or work becomes evident during equalization or acceptance testing, the Contractor will continue his work until the system is acceptable at no addition to the contract price. If approval is delayed because of defective equipment, or failure of equipment or installation to meet the requirements of these specifications, the Contractor will pay for additional time and expenses of the Architect at the Architect's standard rate in effect at that time, during any extension of the acceptance testing period. 2.3 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Provide four hours instruction to Owner designated personnel on the use and operation of the System, by an instructor fully knowledgeable and qualified in system operation. The System Reference Manuals should be complete and on site at the time of this instruction. 27 21 72 - 10 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 END OF SECTION 27 21 72 27 21 72 - 11 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms CLASSROOM AUDIO VIDEO SYSTEMS 27 21 72 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENTIONALLY BLANK 272172-12 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms PART 1 - GENERAL o FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 1.1 GENERAL A. Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1. 1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Location: 1. Showalter Middle School 4268 S. 144th St. Tukwila, WA 98168 1.3 SECTION INCLUDES A. Provide a complete bidder design addressable fire alarm system complete with a fire alarm control panel, NAC Booster Panels, remote annunciator, smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, duct detectors, audio/visual notification devices, sprinkler devices, fire/smoke dampers, door closers, door holders, pre -action systems, and all wiring. Basis of design electrical drawings show recommend Locations for fire alarm devices. Subcontractor is responsible for fire alarm all changes by AHJ and providing fire watch. B. The I01000 fire alarm panel will be newly installed during Showalter M.S. Renovations prior to the portable building fire alarm installation. In order to maintain the warranty of the new panel, the portable building fire alarm contractor shall hire the company that installed the EST IO1.000 panel to terminate and program the new portable fire alarm circuits at the main fire alarm panel to maintain the warranty. C. Refer to Site Plan Drawings for Sequencing of cabling installations. D. Program existing digital alarm communication transmitter (UDACT) for connection of the existing fire alarm control panel to a UL listed fire alarm monitoring services central station per zone table refer to detail sheet or provide by point. Interface existing Udact with existing AES radio add a teletap module to transmit per point. E. Submit fire alarm design documents and shop drawings to Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for plan review. Obtain fire alarm system installation permits. F. Install, program and test system to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and all code enforcement authority. G. Contractor will provide all fire watch if the fire alarm will be out of service during replacement. 1.4 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Division 26 Section "Common Work for Electrical". B. Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Cables (600 V And Less)". 283100-1 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms Now"' C. Division 26 Section "Raceways and Boxes". 1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS AND LABOR FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 A. Provide extra materials, outlet boxes, installation, wiring, testing and programming in the quantities listed below. Install devices in locations as directed by the Owner's representative. Provide 20' of conduit and wiring for each device. Uninstalled equipment shall be turned over to the Owner's representative at the end of the project. Unused labor shall not be credited. B. Horn/Strobe Units: 2% of the number of units indicated on the Plans, but not less than one. C. Smoke Detectors, Sensors, Fire Detectors, and Flame Detectors: 2 % of the number of units of each type indicated on the Plans but not less than one of each type. D. Detector & Sensor Bases: 2 % of the number of units of each indicated on the Plans but not less than one of each type. E. Monitor Modules: 2 % of the number of units indicated on the Plans but not less than one. F. Control relays: 2 % of the number of units indicated on the Plans but not less than one. G. Connection to combination smoke fire dampers: 1 percent of the number of units indicated on the plans, but not less than 1. 1.6 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Perform all work in accordance with the requirements of the latest issue of the following codes and standards, unless specifically directed otherwise in this specification in order to allow designs in excess of the code requirement. 1. International Building Code a. International Mechanical Code b. International Fire Code c. NFPA 70 — National Electrical Code d. NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code e. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code f. NEC - National Electric Code (NFPA 70) g. NFC - National Fire Code h. American Disabilities Act i. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Standards: 50, 268, 864, 268A, 521, 228 j. 464, 38, 346, 1481, 1076, 1971 k. Local and State Building Codes 1. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) m. Local rules and interpretations required by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 283100-2 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 1.7 FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 A. General: The entire Fire Alarm System shall be installed by skilled electricians and technicians certified by the equipment manufacturer, all who are properly trained and qualified for this work. As a minimum, conform to all codes and manufacture's recommendations. B. The Contractor shall have one person with NICET III or higher on staff to oversee project and sign off on fire alarm design plans. The NICET person shall be on site a minimum of two times during construction, Pre -test, and Final Test. C. The Contractor shall have installed at least five systems of similar size and configuration. D. Supervise, program and commission the system and provide warranty service. Provide any replacement part on site within 48-hours. F. Provide a fully equipped, qualified repair technician at the job site within four -hours of a request for emergency service. This service shall be available 24-hours/day during the term of the warranty. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Prepare and submit shop drawings and catalog cut sheets for approval within the time period as stated in the General Conditions. Drawings shall first be submitted to the Authority Having Jurisdiction for approval. Upon receipt of this approval, drawings and catalog cut sheets shall then be submitted as stated in the General Conditions. Contractor shall not start any construction or order any materials prior to acceptance and approval of all submittals. Partial submittals are unacceptable. Submittals, as a minimum, shall include the following: 1. Floor plans drawn with same size and scale as the Contract Drawings. Drawings shall indicate device locations, raceway/wire routing, riser diagrams, conduit and wire size, wire identification numbers, room and floor identification numbers. 2. Point to point wiring diagrams of the control panels, remote annunciator panel(s), and terminal cabinets showing all installed wiring (not factory wiring harnesses) and connection of all field wiring to the units. 3. Detailed mounting installation diagrams of the control panel(s) and remote annunciator(s). 4. Battery calculations. 5. Provide Fire Alarm Control and NAC Booster Panels notification circuits calculations with counts, required amps, voltage drop, and required circuits being provided. This calculation shall also show the number of require notification and NAC Booster panels being provided. a. Each notification circuit shall be limited to only 80 percent of its total capacity at the time of initial installation. b. Add 10% capacity for future notification circuits in each building, but not less than one. 6. Riser diagrams with circuit identification labels, terminal wire identification, conduit and wire size, and device locations (with room names and numbers). 7. Operational description of the system, or a schematic ladder type logic diagram. 8. Front view of the control panel(s) and all annunciator panels. 9. Half size floor plan with zoning and addressable point graphic map plans. (no wire shown) 10. Nameplates and messages on the control panel(s) and annunciators shall be provided in actual size. 11. Wiring diagrams for all connections to interposing relays, control panels, HVAC equipment, elevator recall and other systems. 28 31 00 - 3 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM Temporary Portable Classrooms 28 31 00 12. List of site personal that are qualified factory and state certificated. 13. The Contractor shall provide NICET III or higher cert. 14. The Contractor shall submit a written acceptance test procedure for approval by the Owner's representative. 1.9 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS A. While the system installation is in progress, one set of shop drawings will be kept at the job site. This set will be designated as the construction drawings and will be updated each working day to reflect current as -built information. One set of construction drawings can be replaced with a fresh updated set of drawings but there shall never be more than one active set of construction drawings. The Owner's representative shall be given access to this set of construction drawings at all times so that progress may be reviewed and copies may be made. At the end of the project these marked -up construction drawings shall be submitted as part of the as -built drawings. 1.10 FIRE ALARM WIRING SYSTEM A. Wiring shall be in accordance with Article 760 of the National Electrical Code and Local Electrical Codes. 1.11 PERMITS A. This Contractor shall be responsible to obtain required fire alarm system construction permits, Shop Drawing approvals and final approvals from Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). This Contractor shall furnish and install all required fire alarm system equipment imposed by AHJ at the Shop Drawing review and final system acceptance test period. 1.12 FIRE ALARM MONITORING A. Provide connection to Owner designated central monitoring service. Communicator shall report separately each alarm point to the monitoring service. 1.13 WARRANTY A. The entire fire alarm installation shall be warranted for one-year against defective equipment, materials, and workmanship. B. Emergency warranty service shall be available within four -hours of a request 24-hours a day. The warranty period is to begin on the date the owner accepts the system. 1.14 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Equipment and Materials Shall Include: 1. Fire Alarm Control Panel or Panels (FACP). 2. Remote Annunciator. 3. Alarm Initiating Devices. 4. Alarm Notification Devices. 5. Auxiliary devices and equipment connected thereto as specified herein. 6. Wire, cable and raceways for interconnecting the above and connecting the system to an Owner approved monitoring agency. 28 31 00 - 4 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 B. System shall be hard wired, non -coded, positive, successive, non -interfering, and electrically supervised. 1.15 POWER REQUIREMENTS A. The control panel shall receive 120V AC power (as noted on the plans) via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit. B. The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120V AC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of 24-hours with l0-minutes of alarm operation at the end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations shall be automatic. C. All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24V DC and shall be individually fused at the control panel. 1.16 ADDRESSABLE PERIPHERAL NETWORK A. Communication with devices: The system must provide communication with all initiating and control devices individually. All of these devices are to be individually annunciated at the control panel. Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point: 1. Alarm. 2. Trouble. 3. Open. 4. Short. 5. Ground. 6. Device Fail/or Incorrect Device. B. All devices are to have the capability of being disabled or enabled individually. C. Format: 1. The communication format must be a poll/response protocol to allow T-tapping of the wire to addressable devices and be completely digital. A high degree of communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error checking routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data transmission protocol. Systems that do not utilize full digital transmission protocol (i.e. that may use time pulse width methods to transmit data etc.) will not be acceptable since they are considered unreliable and prone to errors. D. Identification of Addressable Devices: 1. Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code entered on each device at time of installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.2 GENERAL A. All materials and equipment shall be new. Previously used equipment or discontinued models shall not be acceptable unless specifically identified elsewhere in this specification. 283100-5 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 2.3 MANUFACTURER FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 A. The fire alarm control equipment shall consist of a system assembled as an approved unit of regularly manufactured components, by a single manufacturer for the purposes described elsewhere in this specification. Interconnecting equipment that has not been listed for interconnection or the creation of components or system into a non-standard unit that is not normally available from the manufacturer is not acceptable. B. Ali equipment shall be listed, cross listed and labeled by Underwriters' Laboratories or approved by Factory Mutual. C. Existing fire alarm control panels and related equipment shall be manufactured by EST is basis of design. 1. EST #I01000. 2. Or other reviewed and approved Manufacturers. 2.4 LOCKS A. Locks for cabinets and enclosures shall be keyed. 2.5 EXCEPTIONS A. Exceptions or substitutions may not be made to any specified or named product unless "or approved equal" is included in the specification. See spec section 01. 2.6 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANELS (FACP) to Existing EST 101000. A. FACP shall incorporate power supplies, and all controls for the system except as described elsewhere within the specification. All components shall be mounted within a steel enclosure with locked door(s). Door(s) shalt incorporate a transparent window for viewing indicator lights, and other pertinent components. Provisions shall be inade in or near the FACP for storing connection and schematic wiring diagrams, and emergency operating plans. B. Fire Alarm System, including FACP, shall be wired for "Class B" operation on and signaling (Evacuation) circuits. C. All controls shall be labeled; all zone locations shall be clearly identified. Subrnit wording for approval as a part of the contractor's submittal package documents. D. Power Supplies: 1. The emergency or standby 24V DC power supply shall contain standby batteries and automatic charger with the following requirements: a. Sealed gelled cell type batteries. b. 24-hour system backup capability plus 5-minutes of full alarm operation at the end of the 24-hour period. c. Charger shall be able to restore batteries to full charge within 24-hours after a complete discharge. d. Battery and charging system shall be supervised, including trouble annunciation of high/low voltage, shorted cell and open circuits. 28 31 00 - 6 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 2.7 REMOTE LCD ANNUNCIATOR(S) (1 FIRE DEJECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 A. Annunciator shall consist of an 80 Character, backlit, alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD). Infoi illation shall be presented in clear, descriptive English language and includes: point status (alarm trouble), etc.); alarm type (smoke detector, manual station, etc.); number of system alarms, supervisory conditions, and trouble conditions; and a custom location label. B. Provide remote LED graphic annunciator driver to control existing remote LED graphic annunciator. Provide existing modify kit to add new building. 2.8 ALARM NOTIFICATION DEVICES (Match EST protocol) A. Audio Notification Appliance: 1. Shall be manufactured by except for the devices see below. a. Horn: Piezoelectric type horn shall be listed to UL 464. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA at 24V DC. The horn shall mount directly to a standard single gang, double gang or 4" square electrical box, without the use of special adapter or trim rings. b. Visual indicating appliances shall be white color. B. Visual Flashing Lamps (Strobe): 1. Visual indicating appliances shall be comprised of a Xenon flashtube and be entirely solid state. These devices shall be listed under UL Standard 1971 and be capable of either ceiling or wall mounting. The Lexan lens shall be pyramidal in shape to allow better visibility. Visual units shall be of the stand-alone type or be incorporated as part of the (Speaker, Horn, Bell)unit, and shall meet current ADA requirements. 2. Visual indicating appliances shall be white color. C. Audio/Visual Alarm Notification Appliance: 1. AudibleNisible: Combination AudibleNisible (AN) Notification Appliances shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific strobe. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA at 24V DC. The audible/visible enclosure shall mount directly to standard single gang, double gang or 4" square electrical box, without the use of special adapters or trim rings. 2. Horn/Strobe as Equal. 3. AudioNisual units shall be white color. 4. Notification Appliance Circuit provides synchronization of strobes at a rate of 1Hz and operates horns with a Temporal Code Pattern operation. The circuit shall provide the capability to silence the audible signals, while the strobes continue to flash, over a single pair of wires. The capability to synchronize multiple notification appliance circuits shall be provided. 5. Weather-proof Combination AudibleNisible: a. Hermetically sealed for moisture proof or dust proof installations. This device is provided with a special weather-proof back box with 1/2" conduit threads for attachment of conduit. For indoor or outdoor use when watertight seal is required, use weather-proof boxes. b. UL listed For NEMA-4X 28 31 00 - 7 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 c. Notification Appliances shall be listed to UL 1971 and UL 464. The strobe light shall consist of a xenon flash tube and associated lens/reflector system. Provide a label inside the strobe lens to indicate the listed candela rating of the specific strobe. The horn shall have a minimum sound pressure level of 85 dBA at 24V DC. d. Provide water tight conduit, wiring, and connections as required for weatherproofarea. e. Weather-proof horn/strobe or equal. 6. The Accessories: The contractor shall furnish any necessary accessories. 7. Audio/Visual units shall be red color. 2.9 ADDRESSABLE DEVICE TYPES (Match Existing EST) A. General: 1. The system control panel, over its two wire multi -drop channel, must be capable of communicating with the types of addressable devices specified below, B. Addressable Spot Type Smoke Detectors: 1. The Photoelectric type detector shall be a plug-in unit, which mounts to a twist lock base, and shall be UL listed. 2. The detectors shall be of the solid-state photoelectric type and shall contain no radioactive material. They will use a pulsed infrared LED light source and be sealed against rear airflow entry. 3 The detector shall fit into a base that is common with both the heat detector and ionization type detector and shall be compatible with other addressable detectors, addressable manual stations, and addressable Monitor Modules on the same circuit. The detector shall also fit into a non -addressable base that is capable of being monitored by an addressable Zone Adapter Module. 4. There shall be no limit to the number of detectors or Monitor Modules, which may be activated, or "in alarm" simultaneously. C. Addressable Heat Detectors: 1. Thermal detector heads must be UL listed. They shall be rate compensated type, and available in 135degrees F and 190 degrees F temperature rating. D. Addressable Pull Stations: 1. Addressable pull stations will contain electronics that communicate the station's status (alarm, normal) to the control panel over two wires, which also provide power to the pull station. The address will be set on each station. The stations will be manufactured from high impact red Lexan. Lettering will be raised and painted white. The station will mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset by opening with a key common to all system locks. Pull stations shall be double action. 2. The front of the station is to be hinged to a back -plate assembly and must be opened with a key to reset the station. The key shall be common with the control panels. Stations, which use alien wrenches or special tools to reset, will not be accepted. The station shall consist of high impact Lexan, red in color. 3. The addressable manual station shall be capable of field programming of its "address" location on an addressable signaling line circuit. 4. There shall be no limit to the number of stations, detectors, or Monitor Modules, which may be activated or "in alarm" simultaneously. 5. The addressable manual station shall be Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. listed. 28 31 00 - 8 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM. Temporary Portable Classrooms 28 31 00 6. Provide pull stations with protective shield and NEMA-3R on special locations (Gymnasiums, outdoor area). Protective shield shall be equipped with horn and battery suitable for surface -mounted. E. Addressable Photoelectric Duct Detector: 1. The detector shall be non -polarized, 4-wire, 24V DC analog addressable type, which is compatible with the Fire Alarm Panel and obtains its operating power from the supervisory current in the fire alarm detection loop. Auxiliary power shall be supervised by means of UL approved end of line relay. 2. Detectors shall be of the solid-state photoelectric type and shall operate on the light scattering, photodiode principle. To minimize nuisance alarms, detectors shall have an insect screen and be designed to ignore invisible particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set point. No radioactive material shall be used. 3. The detector head shall be directly interchangeable with an ionization detector type. The 24V DC detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch. 4. Detector construction shall have a mounting base with a twist lock detecting head that is lockable. The locking feature must be field removable when not required. Contact between the base and head shall be of the bifurcated type utilizing spring type, self -wiping contacts. Removal of the detector head shall interrupt the supervisory current of the fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the control panel. Detector design shall provide compatibility with other normally open fire alarm detection loop devices (heat detectors, pull stations, etc.). 5. It shall be possible to alarm the duct housing by using a test switch. 6. For maintenance purposes, it shall be possible to clean the duct housing sampling tubes by accessing them through the duct housing front cover. 7. To minimize false alarms, voltage and radio frequency (RF) suppression techniques shall be employed as well as a smoke signal verification circuit and an insect screen. 8. Auxiliary single pole double throw (SPDT) relays. 9. Provide an accessible below ceiling or wall mounted remote LED alarm indicators and key operated test stations shall be installed for all duct detectors above ceiling, hard to access spaces, or as required by codes and AHJ. F. Projection Beam Smoke Detectors: 1. Detector coverage range shall be 30 to 350'. The UL listed spacing for smooth ceilings is 60'. 2. Internal pointability adjustment range shall be +/- 10 degrees vertical and +/- 90 degrees horizontal. 3. Detector shall be provided with 6 sensitivity settings. 4. Detector shall be equipped with fonn "A" and form "C" alarm contacts, and form "B" tamper/trouble contacts. 5. Additional features are to include: Built in power supervision, automatic signal synchronization, automatic environmental compensation and bore sight alignment. 6. Detectors are to be UL, ULC, FM and CSFM approved. 7. Remote test/display panels shall allow remote testing and resetting. Panels are to indicate normal, trouble and alarm. G. Addressable Sensor: 1. The addressable smoke sensors shall be of the photoelectric or ionization type and shall communicate actual smoke chamber values to the system control panel. 2. The addressable temperature sensors shall sense within a temperature range of 32° F. to 158° F. The control panel will be capable of sensing either a set point of 135° F., or a rate -of -rise of 15° F. per minute for fire sensing. For utility sensing, a set point may be chosen within the stated range 283100-9 , Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 3] 00 and the control panel programming will be capable of using that infot uiation to determine specific response such as warning of failure of local temperature controls. 3 The sensors shall be listed to UL Standard 268 and shall be documented as compatible with the control equipment to which they are connected. The sensors shall be listed for both ceiling and wall mount applications. 4. Each sensor base shall contain a LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the control panel (once every 4 seconds). When the control panel determines that a sensor is in the alarm or a trouble condition, the control panel shall command the LED on that sensor's base to turn on steady indicating the abnormal condition. Sensors that do not provide a visible indication of an abnormal condition at the sensor location shall not be acceptable. 5. Sensor bases shall be provided with a relay driver output that is to be controlled either automatically or manually from the control panel. 6. Each sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing at the sensor location. 7. Each sensor shall be scanned by the control panel for its type identification to prevent inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. The control panel shall operate with the installed device but shall initiate a "Wrong Device" trouble condition until the proper type is installed or the programmed sensor type is changed. 8. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI. H. Monitor Module: 1. Monitor Modules on plate shall be used for monitoring of water flow, valve tamper, non -addressable detectors, and for control of evacuation indicating appliances and AHU systems. 2. An addressable monitor module shall be provided for interfacing normally open direct contact devices to an addressable signaling line circuit. 3. Monitor Modules shall be capable of mounting in a standard electric outlet box. Monitor Modules shall receive their 24V DC power from a separate two wire pair running from an appropriate power supply. 4. Use mini monitor modules only behind the local device. Module Functions: 1. For conventional 2-wire smoke detector and/or contact device monitoring with Style-B or Style-D (NFPA 72 initiating device circuit) wiring supervision. 2. This type of addressable device module will provide power to, and monitor the status of a zone consisting of conventional 2-wire smoke detectors and/or N/O contact devices. The supervision of the initiating device circuit wiring will be Style-B. These modules will communicate the zone's status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the control panel. 3. For conventional 4-wire smoke detector and/or contact device monitoring with Style-B or Style-D (NFPA 72 initiating device circuit) wiring supervision. 4. This type of addressable device module will provide power to and monitor the status of a zone consisting of conventional 4-wire smoke detectors and/or N/O contact devices. The supervision of the initiating device circuit wiring will be Style-B and/or Style-D as also identified in the Schedule on the Plans. The module will provide detector reset capability and a 2A fuse to provide over current power protection for the 4-wire detector. These modules will communicate the zone's status (normal, alarm, trouble) to the control panel. 5. For alarm notification appliances, and other device control with Style-Y or Style-Z wiring supervision. 6. This type of addressable device will provide double pole double throw relay switching that can be used to connect through easily replaceable 2A fuses: A circuit of alarm notification appliances to a 28 31 00 - 10 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms c FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 power source; or activate a variety of controlled devices. The module will be available in either a Style-Y or Style-Z supervision version. In the Style-Y version, an end of line device will supervise the wiring. In the Style-Z version, the wiring will be looped back and connected to the module to allow continual operation of the controlled devices even if the wiring sustains a single break. These modules will communicate the supervised wiring status (normal, trouble) to the fire alarm control panel and will receive a command to transfer the relay from the fire alarm control panel. 7. For non -supervised control. 8. This type of addressable device will provide double pole double throw relay switching for loads up to 120V AC. It will contain easily replaceable 2A fuse, one on each common leg of the relay. 9. The module shall be supervised and uniquely identified by the control panel. Device identification shall be transmitted to the control panel for processing according to the program instructions. Should the module become non -operational, tampered with, or removed, a discrete trouble signal, unique to the device, shall be transmitted to, and annunciated at, the control panel. 10. The module shall be capable of being programmed for its "address" location on the addressable device signaling line circuit. The module shall be compatible with addressable manual stations and addressable detectors on the same addressable circuit. Conventional All Weatherproof Rate Compensation Heat Detector: 1. Hermetically sealed for moisture proof or dust proof installations. Requires no special back box. Has plastic hexagonal grip bushing with conduit threads for attachment to threaded hub cover, or any outlet box. For indoor or outdoor use when watertight seal is required, use weatherproof box. 2. Provide weatherproof deep j-box with cover for all exterior devices. 3. Provide addressable mini point module inside weatherproof j-box. K. All devices will be supervised for trouble conditions. The system control panel will be capable of indicating the type of trouble condition (open, short, device missing/failed). Should a device fail, it will not hinder the operation of other system devices. Should a problem occur on a particular wire run, it will not affect other wire runs. 2.10 SPRINKLER A. Provide all addressable modules and connections and interface requirements for fire alarm system supervision and alarm of fire sprinkler system. 2.11 COMBINATION SMOKE FIRE DAMPERS A. Provide connections to operate all combination smoke fire dampers, existing and new. 2.12 SPARES A. In addition to spare capacities and equipment listed in other portions of this specification, the following spare components shall be provided and installed in the FACP cabinet. 1. Smoke Detector Head — One . 2. Addressable Heat Detector Head — One. 3. Ceiling Horn/strobe — One. 4. Wall Strobe — One. 5. Addressable Input Point Module - One. 6. Addressable Relay Module - One. 283100-11 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School. Temporary Portable Classrooms 2.13 GRAPHIC MAP FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 A. Revise Existing Graphic map shall be mounted adjacent to the remote annunciator and fire alarm panel. Map shall consist of a 1/16" = 1' scale floor plan graphic rendering of the building with rooms identified by names or number. B. Haft size graphic map of each floor with zones and addressable point devices. (No wire). C. Provide graphic map fire alarm as -built drawing of the existing and new fire alarm device points. Add them to the new Graphic Map posted next to the existing fire alarm remote annunciator and panel. 2.14 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Marking Services, Inc. (MSI): http://www.markserv.com. 2. Double 0 Laser Services, Inc. http://www.doubleolaser.com. 3. Or approved equal. B. Fire Alarm Main Control. Panel, Fire Alarm Subpanels, and Duct detectors Nameplates: Engraved plastic, high contrast for maximum visibility. 1/16" engraving plastic with mounting adhesive backing. 1. Fire Alarm Panels: White letters on Red. Description: Example: Panel Name: MAIN FIRE ALARM Node 10 AC Panel 2X2A Breaker #34 Node #: AC PANEL: BREAKER #: 2. Duct Detector Locations: White letters on Red 1"x3" plate with 1/4" letters. Description: Example: Device Name: DUCT SLC1-S26 C. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use for identification of all fire alarm input and output control devices. Description: Example: Device Name: N 1 OSLC 1-S26 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPROVAL A. No equipment shall be provided at the job site until shop drawings have been reviewed and approved by the Authority .Having Jurisdiction. An approved shop drawing set shall be continuously available at the job site during construction. 28 31 00 - 12 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 3.2 MOUNTING POSITION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 A. Evacuation horns and strobes shall be mounted in accordance with UL Standard 1971 and Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements. B. Fire Alarm Duct Detector shall be mounted in accordance with UL Standard 268A, NFPA90, NFPA 92A&B, NFPA72, and Authority Having Jurisdiction requirements. 1. Fire alarm duct detectors are require for all HVAC unit 2000CFM or above per code and AHJ. Fire alarm duct detectors are typically supervisory alarm mode, but some local AHJ want alarm mode. Coordinate what mode the AHJ wants for this site prior to final programming and inspection. 2. If possible in large HVAC units mount duct detector inside the HVAC unit. 3. Location of the fire alarm duct detector shall be mounted minimum of 3-feet in or on air ducts shall be downstream from any duct openings, deflection plats, sharp bends or branch connections. 4. This detail shows the shutdown of HVAC unit upon fire alarm duct detector alarm or supervisory mode as required to be controlled by code. 5. Fire alarm contractor to provide duct detector to mechanical contractor to be install and electrical contractor wire all connections to the HVAC units and duct detectors. 6. Mount duct detectors per code and in accessible space. Provide remote test/led annunciator for any duct detector that is above drop ceiling and has hard access. 7. Provide nameplate per spec 28 31 00 para 3.4 on access point and next to drop ceiling tile. 8. Provide a written detail description of each duct detector location to direct a person to that location in the closeout documents. 3.3 MOUNTING METHODS A. Conduit, panels, devices and boxes shall be secured by means of expansion shields in concrete, machine screws on metal surfaces and wood screws on wood construction. Attachment with devices driven in by power charge or nail type nylon anchors are not acceptable in lieu of machine screws. 3.4 WIRING A. Provide plenum -rated cable for all cabling. 1. The manufacturer's recommendations shall only be used as a minimum requirement. 2. Exception to plenum -rated cable is underground -rated cable when fire alarm cabling leaves the building. Provide protect per manufacture requirements. B. General Wiring System: 1. All wire shall be new, UL approved and marked, and brought to the job site in original packages. 2. Wire insulation shall be one of the types required by NEC. All wires shall be sized per the NEC for the load serviced. Field wiring for initiation, supervision and signal circuits shall be solid conductor. All wire shall be rated at 105 degrees C and be approved for fire alarm installations. 3. Twisted wire shall twists per foot rate in accordance with equipment manufacturer's requirements. 4. Aluminum wire is prohibited. 5. Wire pulls by powered mechanical means will not be permitted. Conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material just prior to pulling the wire or cable. Lubricants shall be compounds specifically prepared for cable pulling and shall not contain petroleum or other products, which will affect cable insulation. 6. Wire that has scrapes, nicks, gouges, or crushed insulation shall not be used and shall be removed. 28 31 00 - 13 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 7. Low voltage energy limited wiring shall not be run in the same wireways with or closely parallel to high voltage and/or switched power wiring. 8. Interposing relays shall be used for all switched power loads and shall be located such that the switched power conductors do not run in the same wireway as the interposing relay coil power or any other energy limited low voltage conductors. 9. No wire run or circuit shall be longer than 80 % of the maximum allowable length and power consumption for the wire size and application. No alarm input/output circuit shall exceed 80 % of the maximum load capacity specified by the manufacturer. 10. Splicing shall be minimized and shall be accomplished only in accessible outlets, junction, or cabinet boxes, which are clearly indicated on the as-builts. 11. All wiring for each floor shall be terminated in a terminal cabinet prior to running the wires to the fire alarm panel. Provide at least one terminal cabinet for each floor in each building. 12. All solid wire terminations shall be made bare to screw terminals specifically designed for bare wire connection. All stranded wire terminations shall be made with T&B "Sta-Kon" (or equivalent) self -insulated, spade lugs where connected to screw type terminals. 13. Wiring in all cabinets and terminal boxes shall be neatly arranged and bundled with tyraps or equivalent. 14. Wires shall be numbered at each connection, termination, and junction box. 15. All conductors shall be tagged, labeled, and color coded. Color coding shall be by wire insulation, not taping or banding. The numbering and color -coding shall be continuous for each circuit wire. Tag numbers shall agree with wire numbers assigned on manufacturer's wiring diagrams and the installation wiring diagrams and drawings. 3.5 AUXILIARY CONTROL WIRING A. Conductors and power supplies of sufficient size shall be installed to minimize voltage drop consistent with the proper operation of all devices, including spare device requirements as hereinbefore specified. 3.6 AUXILIARY CONTROLS A. Provide all raceways, conductors and auxiliary relays to control the following: 1. HVAC units shunt down. 2. Smoke fire dampers. 3. Door holders. 4. Elevator recalls. 5. Access control unlocks or release. 3.7 VISUAL ALARM APPLIANCES A. Provide visual alai m appliances with sync and light output intensity to comply with room size in accordance with NFPA 72, Table. 3.8 AUDIO ALARM APPLIANCES A. Provide audio alarm appliances with temporal and to be 15db above ambient sound level of the room accordance with NFPA 72, Table. 28 31 00- 14 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 3.9 SMOKE DETECTORS FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 A. Locations of smoke detectors indicated on Drawings are approximate. Install detectors with spacing in accordance with NFPA 72 and the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Adjust locations to coordinate with other equipment, sprinkler, light fixtures, air diffusers. Locate smoke detectors 36" away from air handling diffusers and 24 " from light fixtures. Distance between detectors shall not exceed their listed spacing. Detectors indicated on sloped ceilings shall be located within 3' horizontally of the highest point of the slope. 3.10 PROGRAMMING A. Program system to for complete operation to the satisfaction of the Authority Having Jurisdiction. Program all addressable devices to correspond with final room identification/numbering. Verify room identification with the Owner's representative. B. Factory default install code will not be changed. C. Program owner code to 1111 D. Program the options to access date & time, smoke status, event log, and add devices. 3.11 DOCUMENTS A. As a condition for the project final acceptance, the Contractor shall, prior to final testing, submit the following documents to the Owner's representative for approval. If as a result of final testing there is a change to the system design, then the Contractor shall correct the as -built drawings. B. Record Drawings: 1. Provide as built record drawings indicating the completed installation. Drawings shall be prepared on approved shop drawings with changes marked in red pencil, in a legible and neat manner. Drawings shall indicate locations of: fire alarm devices, junction boxes, terminal cabinets, sensors and controlled equipment (motor starters, fans, pumps, valves, dampers, etc.). Drawings shall indicate: Riser diagrams, sources of power, raceway sizes and routing, type and number of conductors. 2. As -built panel schematic, connection and interconnection wiring diagrams showing all system components. Trunk type wiring diagrams are not acceptable. 3. Component connection diagrams shall show schematic point-to-point identification. 4. Central station monitoring pre -test report of all new addressable points, C. Provide the AHJ at final acceptance the following documents: 1. As -built drawings shall be full construction set with redline markups that contain the following (all zoning, device point numbers, new device conduit or wiring pathways, and exact location of devices and panels.) 2. Haft size graphic map of each floor with zones and addressable point devices. ( No wire ) 3. Central station monitoring pre -test report of all new zones. 4. Fire alarm panel alarm, supervisory, and trouble event log report of all devices. 5. Addressable points list for both bldgs. 6. Completed NFPA 72 Record of Completion current fonns to owner and AHJ. 7. Provide digital copy of all above on one following (cd-rom, dvd, or finger drive). 8. Provide all the above documents in O&M manuals binder. 28 31 00 - 15 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM. 28 31 00 D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Manuals shall contain cut sheets of all equipment and devices installed, wiring diagrams, operational and maintenance instructions. All device options shall be clearly identified. Refer to Division 01 for more information. 2. Manual shall contain all documents in Section 283100 Para 3.11c 3. Contractor to provide O&M Manual binder at each fire alarm panel locations. E. Functional Description for Auxiliary Controls: 1. When an interface exists between the FA system and other control systems or controlled devices, the contractor shall provide a complete narrative describing operational relationships to the FA system. 3.12 TESTING A. The completed system shall be subjected to two required tests. The initial test shall be a preliminary test, which will be witnessed by the Owner's representative. This test shall be completed after the system has been on line for a minimum of seven -days. Should the results not be satisfactory to the Owner's representative's representatives, then correctionswill be made and a re -test will be required at the Contractor's expense. A Contractor's representative and Contractor supplied fire alarm technician shall be present for all testing. The fire alarm technician shall conduct the tests. B. After satisfactory completion of the preliminary testing, the Contractor shall arrange for the Authority Having Jurisdiction to witness a final acceptance test of the system. The Authority Having Jurisdiction will grant final acceptance. Approval of the Authority Having Jurisdiction shall be evidenced in writing and a copy forwarded to the Owner's representative. C. The following items and procedures will be required as a minimum for the preliminary testing of the system: 1. Bypass and control switches shall be operated to indicate proper supervision of the switch. 2. Valve and sprinkler supervision switches shall be operated to verify proper response. 3. Valve and sprinkler supervision switches shall have one wire removed to verify proper supervision. 4. Each alarm output, detection or supervision zone may be tested for proper response to ground conditions. 5. AC power shall be interrupted to see if the system will operate on batteries. Audible devices shall operate for 30-minutes on battery power. 6. All critical fuses shall be removed to check for proper supervision. 7. Detectors shall be tested for alarm operation. 8. Flashing light units will be tested for wiring supervision by removing a wire from the device. The device will also be tested for proper alarm operation. 9. Alarm sounding devices will be tested for proper operation. 10. Audibility tests will be conducted by the Contractor to determine compliance with the dBA requirements. 3.13 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall, after two -weeks (minimum) written notification to the Owner's representative and conduct two training sessions of not less than four -hours length in each session during which all maintenance and operational aspects of the system will be described and demonstrated to personnel selected by the Owner's representative. A manufacturer's representative thoroughly familiar with the characteristics of the installed system shall conduct the session. 28 31 00 - 16 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms 3.14 PROJECT COMPLETION FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 A. Project completion and payment will be based on completion of the foliowing: 1. Completion and approval of acceptance tests. 2. Completion of punch list items. 3. Delivery and acceptance of the as -built drawings and operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Provide cd-rom, dvd, or finger drive of program data in fire alarm panel as required by NFPA-72 codes. 5. Clean-up of installation site to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative. END OF SECTION 283100 28 31 00 - 17 Tukwila School District Showalter Middle School Temporary Portable Classrooms FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00 THIS PAGE LEFT INTENT °NALLY BLANK 28 31 00 - 18 City of Tukwila Department of Community Development May 01, 2019 ALEXANDER CLARK 105 SOUTH MAIN ST #323 SEATTLE, WA 98116 RE: Correction Letter # 1 ELECTRICAL Permit Application Number EL19-0299 SHOWALTER MIDDLE SCHOOL - 4628 S 144TH ST Dear Alexander, Allan Ekberg, Mayor Jack Pace, Director This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the following departments: BUILDING - E DEPARTMENT: Jim Benner at 206-431-3679 if you have questions regarding these comments. CORRECTION/ #1 -SHEET E3.0TP 45 KVA TRANSFORMER T-PI REQUIRES SECONDARY OCPD 150 AMPS MAXIMUM Please address the comments above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that two (2) sets of revised plan pages, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. To better expedite your resubmittal, a 'Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service, Sincerely, Kandace Nichols Permit Technician File No, ELI9-0299 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 5 IIMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: EL19-0299 DATE: 05/09/19 PROJECT NAME: SHOWALTER MIDDLE SCHOOL SITE ADDRESS: 4628 S 144TH ST Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued X Response to Correction Letter # 1 Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: ‘S27 klAgd Eina')}14 Building Division mi Fire Prevention Public Works r Structural E LI Planning Division Permit Coordinator LI u PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable ri (no approval/review required) DATE: 05/14/19 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: n APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved n Corrections Required (corrections entered in Reviews) Approved with Conditions Denied (ie: Zoning Issues DUE DATE: 06/11/19 E Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW D Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 ad00 ad000 111A183d PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: EL19-0299 DATE: 04/05/19 PROJECT NAME: SHOWALTER MIDDLE SCHOOL SITE ADDRESS: 4628 S 144TH ST X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Revision # Revision # before Permit Issued after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: qe\ B ii lding ivision Public Works Fire Prevention Structural PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable (no approval/review required) Planning Division Permit Coordinator DATE: 04/09/19 Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved Corrections Required (corrections entered in Reviews) DUE DATE: 05/07/19 Approved with Conditions ri Denied (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg Fire 1=1 Ping D PW Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 City of Tukwila REVISION SUBMITTAL Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 5-7-2019 Plan Check/Permit Number: EL 19-0299 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ® Response to Correction Letter # I ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner O Deferred Submittal # Project Name: SHOWALTER SCHOOL DISTRICT Project Address: 4628 S 144TH ST Contact Person: Alex Clark Summary of Revision: Phone Number: 206 624 - 4222 Transformer T-P1 has been up -sized from a 45 kVA to a 75 kVA transformer. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA MAY 092019 PERMIT CENTER Sheet Number(s): E3.0TP "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision includin..late of re sion Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by. 0 Entered in TRAKiT on W:Wermit Center (Rachelte)\Kandace - Revision Submittal Form.doc Horne Espanol Cootaet Safety & Health Claims & Insurance 411114 Washington State Department of Labor & Industries A-Z Index Help My 1.M: Workplace Rights Trades & Licensing SCOTT'S ELECTRIC SERVICE, LLC Owner or tradesperson Principals FURRER, RONALD S, PARTNER/MEMBER Doing business as SCOTT'S ELECTRIC SERVICE, LLC WA UBI No. 602 441 505 23811 SR 2 MONROE, WA 98272 206.898-6308 SNOHOMISH County Business type Limited Liability Company Certifications & Endorsements License Verify the contractor's active registration / license / certification (depending on trade) and any past violations. Electrical Contractor Active. Meets current requirements. License specialties GENERAL License no. SCOTTES969RA Effective — expiration 12/01/2004— 02/20/2021 Designated administrator FURRER, RONALD License type Master Electrician Bond DEVELOPERS SURETY & INDEM CO Bond account no. 544442C Received by L&I 12/01/2004 Savings No savings accounts during the previous 6 year period. License Violations No license violations during the previous 6 year period. Active. Meets current requirements. License no. FURRERS974CJ $4,000 00 Effective date 11/15/2004 Expiration date Until Canceled Workers' comp Public Works Requirements Workplace safety and health Help us improve GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ALL SHEETS rolluda architects ELECTRICAL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION GG LIGHTING OR POWER PANEL BD FOR CKTS CIRCUIT WIRING AND CONAND dill I ---- DEV CESNCH EQUIP INDICATED ONDUIT PLANS. (WIRIAS NG AND CONDUIT SIZE MAY NOT APPEAR ON PLANS). PROVIDE CONDUCTORS AND CONDUIT PER NEC CODE. #12 AWG, 3/4"C. MIN. EMT OR RIGID STEEL. 1 INDICATES EQUIP GND. CONDUIT EMT CONDUIT UP CONDUIT DOWN CONDUIT STUB OUT WITH PLASTIC BUSHING BRANCH CIRCUIT HOME RUN 3/4" MIN. GROUNDING ELECTRODE PER CODES DUPLEX RECEPTACLE, 'A' NEXT TO DEVICE INDICATES ABOVE COUNTER TWO DUPLEX RECEPTACLES IN COMMON BACK BOX AND UNDER COMMON PLATE 'A' NEXT TO DEVICE INDICATES ABOVE COUNTER CODE SIZED JUNCTION BOX WITH COVER PLATE FUSED DISCONNECT o —• 3 - �I1 0 agt 0 El ABBREVIATIONS ABBRV. DESCRIPTION ABBRV. DESCRIPTION AFF ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR LTG LIGHTING AL ALUMINUM MAG STAR EF MAGNETIC STARER BKR BREAKER MC MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR C CONDUIT MLO MAIN LUG ONLY CKT CIRCUIT OL OVER LOAD CO CONDUIT AND PULL WIRE ONLY PNL PANEL COMM COMMUNICATION SB SCORE BOARD Cu COPPER SDC SYSTEMS DATA CABINET (E) EXISTING EQUIPMENT OR DEVICE SPECS SPECIFICATIONS EC ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR SW SWITCH EF EXHAUST FAN TCL TACOMA CITY LIGHT EP EXPLOSION PROOF TEL TELEPHONE EQP EQUIPMENT TEMP TEMPERATURE FA FIRE ALARM THRU THROUGH FHPS MANUAL FRACTIONAL HP STARTER TV TELEVISION GC GENERAL CONTRACTOR TYP TYPICAL GFI GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER WG WIRE GUARD HPS HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM WP WEATHER PROOF JB JUNCTION BOX VFD VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE LCC LIGHTING CONTROL CENTER XFMR TRANSFORMER GRS GALVANIZED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT 1. E.C. TO PROVIDE ALL MATERIAL AND LABOR FOR MAINTAINING FIRE RATING OF WALLS IN AREAS WHERE ELECTRICAL DEVICES PENETRATE IN OR THROUGH. 2. ALL FLUSH MOUNT EQUIPMENT, CABINET AND PANEL BOARD SHALL HAVE FACTORY TYPE FLUSH MOUNT TRIM KIT FOR COMPLETE INSTALLATION. 3. PROVIDE COMPLETE WORK FOR REQUIREMENTS AS DESCRIBED ON LEGEND. 4. ALL EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT, PANELS OR DEVICES SHALL BE WEATHERPROOF AND WITH NEMA-3R ENCLOSURE TYPE. 5. CIRCUITS, WIRE SIZE AND WIRE HASH MARKS ARE SHOWN FOR CIRCUIT CLARITY, BUT MAY NOT NECESSARILY REPRESENT THE COMPLETE WIRING COUNTS AND MINIMUM SIZES FOR CONNECTING THE CIRCUITS SHOWN. E.C. TO INCLUDE IN THE BID, ALL THE REQUIRED WIRING SIZES AND NUMBER OF CONDUCTORS IN ORDER TO INSTALL ALL CIRCUITS SHOWN AS NECESSARY. 6. ALL ONE LINES, RISERS, AND CONDUIT ROUTING ARE SCHEMATICS AND ARE NOT SHOWING EXACT PHYSICAL ARRANGEMENT OF EQUIPMENT. WHERE INDICATED ON DRAWINGS ALL JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES ARE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL OTHER FITTINGS AND PULL BOXES OF ADEQUATE SIZE IN THE RACEWAY SYSTEM WHEREVER NECESSARY OR REQUIRED BY NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE. PROVIDE EXPANSION JOINT FITTINGS FOR CONDUITS PASSING THROUGH NEW OR EXISTING EXPANSION JOINTS INSTALLED BETWEEN BUILDING. VERIFY EXACT LOCATIONS AND DETAILS OF EXPANSION JOINTS PRIOR TO WORK. COORDINATE ALL CONDUIT ROUTING, PULL BOX AND EQUIPMENT LOCATIONS. ALL EMPTY CONDUITS SHALL HAVE PULL WIRES. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE ALL WALL OR ROOF PENETRATIONS AND SEALING AS REQUIRED FOR ROUTING OF RACEWAY SYSTEMS. GENERAL NOTES 1. IN AREAS WHERE ROOF STRUCTURE/DECKING IS EXPOSED E.C. SHALL PROVIDE ALTERNATE MEANS FOR DEVICE ATTACHMENT. E.C. SHALL PROVIDE UNISTRUT OR OTHER APPROVED METHODS FOR ATTACHMENT BETWEEN TRUSSES OR BEAMS. IN NO CASE SHALL ANY DEVICE BE MOUNTED ON THE EXPOSED UNDERSIDE OF THE ROOF DECK WITHOUT PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE OWNER/ENGINEER ALL SUPPORT ITEMS SHALL BE PAINTED TO MATCH SURROUNDING SURFACE ALL MEANS OF SUPPORT/ATTACHMENT SHALL BE APPROVED BY THE OWNERJENGINEER. 2. E.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATION OF ALL AREA'S THAT REQUIRE CUTTING AND PATCHING OF EXISTING AREAS WHERE ELECTRICAL WORK IS REQUIRED FOR CONDUIT INSTALLATION. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE AND WILL PROVIDE ALL CUTTING, PATCHING AND FINAL FINISH. 3. CONTRACTOR IS REQUIRED TO VISIT THE SITE PRIOR TO BID AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH REQUIREMENTS FOR ROUTING NEW FEEDER CONDUITS AND BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUIT OR WIREMOLD TO NEW PANELS. RE'V!SIONS : t.r.al Plan ,evev; FILE OaRI IPermaNn. ��-��� -QI a..a et' vt aN c c ec a role ant t'"sspin5 A D: Val. ., ..on.,.:. amenlsoces { a,. r n etl Mle a FCat 1 40 , � ` ,- F � 4 D v is S o OVY"^-„yR. APNVTEEWRIS TO —Ft t00 . L,ANC€JNT�+I Nrc)t, . C - BC NAY 202019 1,Ny7 wit ;'ty of Tukv"I) BUILDING DIVISIO., ELECTRICAL SHEET LIST E0.0TP ELECTRICAL LEGEND, ABBREVIATION AND NOTES E1.OTP SITE PLAN -POWER E2.OTP SITE PLAN - SYSTEMS E3.0TP POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAMS AND NOTES E4.OTP PANEL SCHEDULES AND LOAD CALCULATION E5.0TP FIRE ALARM ONE -LINE DIAGRAM E6.OTP SYSTEMS ONE -LINE DIAGRAMS E7.0TP BUILDING FLOOR PIJN 1ST FLOOR E8.0TP BUILDING FLOOR PLAN 2ND FLOOR 5: PA RATE PERMIT 'EQ3MRED FOR: ' Mechanical Electrical lumbing Gas Piping City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION REGY)VEsn CITY OF"IDK'++1LA APR 05 2019 PERMIT CENTER architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main St. Seattle, WA 98104 p. 206.624.4222 f. 206.624.4226 mail@rolludaarchitects.com litiet TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com 0C 0 0 J V=0 U m ❑ J Q W L.L J g O 02 F— CD (— REVISION =a (n§ tl1 N_-?: N s zw . J v.H 0 H .4- 1- U. 25 U IX N f— W 00 •j W co . m N v i 657,27 rn to to DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. FLR BT RWA 331-17-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Issue Date: 03-28-2019 Drawing Title ELECTRICAL LEGEND, ABBRE. AND NOTES Drawing Number EO.OTP rolluda architects I -r EJ MAINT. BUILDING B 2-STORY 11, ADMIN r :D - CThTTh \S / 1 /.�\ : , i -` .-\ ,-\ 1` I \ \_,_. s i 13 II KC)'\ 0 0 0 H GENERAL NOTES 1. SEE ELECTRICAL POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM AND PORTABLE POWER SERVICE DIAGRAM ON SHEET E3.0TP FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS. 2. ALL SERVICE MAST CONDUITS SHALL BE RIGID STEEL GALVANIZED AND BE A MINIMUM SIZE OF 1-1/4 INCHES 3. PROVIDE ALL WALL AND CEILING PENETRATIONS AS REQUIRED FOR CONDUIT ROUTING. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS. 4. PORTABLE CONTRACTOR AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL POWER AND SYSTEMS WORK INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND ASSOCIATED SPECIFICATIONS. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PLAN NOTES PROVIDE (2) SEPARATE FEEDER CONNECTIONS TO THE EXISTING 480/277V 30 4W DISTRIBUTION DP. SEE E7.0TP FOR FLOOR PLAN. PROVIDE CONDUITS FROM DIST.'DP TO EXTERIOR OF BUILDING ABOVE CEILING OF 1ST FLOOR. ROUTE CONDUITS THROUGH EAST WALL OF ELECTRICAL ROOM AND THROUGH CEILING SPACE TO AND THROUGH EXTERIOR WALL. PROVIDE (2) SETS OF LB'S, CONDUITS, & MAST. EXTEND MAST TO HEIGHT EQUAL WITH POWER/DATA POLE. PROVIDE 30 FOOT UTILITY GRADE POWER/DATA POLE. PROVIDE LOCATOR SERVICES AT POLE LOCATION TO VERIFY AREA 15 CLEAR OF EXISTING UNDERGROUND SERVICES. NEMA 3R TRANSFORMERS AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES FOR SERVING POWER TO PORTABLE. ROUTE CONDUITS UNDERGROUND FROM POLE TO LINE SIDE OF DISCONNECT SWITCH. ROUTE CONDUITS UNDERGROUND FROM LOAD SIDE DISCONNECT SWITCH TO PORTABLE PANEL. PORTABLE POWER PANEL WITH UNDERGROUND FEEDER CONNECTIONS. PROVIDE OVERHEAD QUADRUPLEX SERVICE WIRING FROM BUILDING EXTERIOR TO POLE ADJACENT PORTABLE. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM CLEARANCE OF 18FT ABOVE FIRE LANE. EXISTING SYSTEMS VAULT TO REMAIN. VERIFY CONDUIT ROUTING FROM VAULT TO AVOID CONFLICTS WITH NEW POWER POLE. VAULT IS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE LOCATION ONLY. NO WORK REQUIRED AT VAULT. r-- ELI3-oz99 QOEvr C Ef.'t' T1M PLt.'Ai(N 416' T' NAY 2Ci019 City ctTukwila. I WILDING OIVISK.r RECEIVED CITY OF 1 UKWILA architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main St. Seattle, WA 98104 p. 206.624.4222 f. 206.624.4226 mail@rolludaarchitects.com N TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. FLR BT RWA 331-17-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Issue Date: 03-28-2019 Drawing Title SITE PLAN - POWER Drawing Number SITE PLAN - POWER SCALE: 1" = 30'-0' APR 052011 PERMIT CENTER EI.OTP II r Il 11 11 !1 ! S. 144TH STREET S.W. MAINT. 0 ( 14 FIRE ALARM) v ' \—TELECOM)I.C. 14 1s 1s SYSTEMS PULL BOX AND MAST AT PORTABLES (TYP) NTS BUILDING B 2-STORY CJ C'7 pp� HEXISTING MAIN DISTRI 0 v BLDG A 2-STORY / / / / /, / / 1\1\111\11\IIII\\J_ /Th --'.)• - •tit X . i �... •E._.•• .,�, t • .�. = SITE PLAN - SYSTEMS SCALE: 1' = 301-0" BLDG C 1-STORY BLDG D 1-STORY DISTRIBUTION PANEL DP'—* u NEW POLE 0000 J m 0 0 W f— EL w0 P3 --------.-'------- GENERAL NOTES 1. PROVIDE ALL COMPONENTS, CABLING AND CONNECTIONS AS REQUIRED IN THE MAIN BUILDING, AND AT EACH PORTABLE FOR COMPLETE OPERATION OF THE FIRE ALARM, TELECOM, AND INTERCOM/CLOCK SYSTEMS TO EACH PORTABLE FOR COMPLETE OPERATION. 2. PORTABLE CONTRACTOR AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL POWER AND SYSTEMS WORK INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND ASSOCIATED SPECIFICATIONS. PLAN NOTES OPROVIDE TELECOMMUNICATIONS, INTERCOM/CLOCK AND FIRE ALARM CONNECTIONS FROM THE MAIN BUILDING HEAD END EQUIPMENT TO NEW PORTABLE BUILDINGS. ROUTE TELECOM AND INTERCOM/CLOCK IN EXISTING CABLE TRAY AND CONDUIT SLEEVES FROM SECOND FLOOR IDF ROOM TO MDF ROOM ON FIRST FLOOR. ROUTE FIRE ALARM IN 3/4' CONDUIT INSIDE BUILDING FROM SECOND FLOOR IDF TO FIRE ALARM PANEL ON FIRST FLOOR. OPROVIDE (2) 12"x12"x4" NEMA 3R PULL BOXES ONE BOX SHALL BE FOR FIRE ALARM AND ONE BOX SHALL BE FOR TELECOM AND INTERCOM/CLOCK WIRING. 0 PROVIDE FIRE ALARM NAC BOOSTER PANEL IN SECOND FLOOR IDF ROOM FOR FIRE ALARM CONNECTIONS TO PORTABLE. OMOUNT PULL BOXES AT APPROXIMATELY 8FT ABOVE THE FINISHED SECOND FLOOR. STUB 1-1/4" EMT CONDUIT FROM TELECOM/I.C. PULL BOX INTO 2ND FLOOR IDF ROOM PROVIDE A 3/4" EMT CONDUIT FROM FIRE ALARM PULL BOX TO NEW NAC PANEL IN IDF ROOM. OMOUNT PULL BOXES ON PORTABLES ABOVE THE ACCESSIBLE CEILING HEIGHT. OPROVIDE A 2" CONDUIT MAST TO SUPPORT AERIAL DUCT. PROVIDE MAST HEIGHT AS REQUIRED FOR CLEARANCES ABOVE BUILDINGS AND ROAD. OPROVIDE (2) 1-1/4" NON-METALLIC HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE FLEXIBLE FIGURE-8 AERIAL RACEWAY, FROM PULL BOXES ON BUILDING 'A' WALL TO NEW POLE ADJACENT NEW PORTABLES. PROVIDE (1) FOR FIRE ALARM WIRING AND (1) FOR TELECOM AND INTERCOMICLOCK CABLING. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 1 BFT OVER FIRE LANE. OPROVIDE (2) 1-1/4" AERIAL RACEWAYS FROM POLE TO PULL BOXES ON PORTABLES. ONE RACEWAY TO EACH BOX. 0 PROVIDE (1) 2-CONDUCTOR #16 AWG WEST PENN AQC225 AND (1) 2-CONDUCTOR #14 AWG WEST PENN AQC226 INDOOR/OUTDOOR RATED FIRE ALARM CABLE TO EACH PORTABLE FROM NEW NAC BOOSTER PANEL IN BUILDING 'A'. 10 PROVIDE (1) 6-CONDUCTOR, 1-PAIR SHIELDED, 2-PAIR UN -SHIELDED #22 AWG WEST PENN AQC373 INDOOR/OUTDOOR RATED INTERCOM/CLOCK CABLING FROM I/C HEAD END IN BUILDING 'A' TO EACH PORTABLE. 11 12 13 14 15 16 PROVIDE (1) 6-STRAND 50/125 MULTIMODE INDOOR/OUTDOOR FIBER OPTIC TELECOMMUNICATION CABLING SUPERIOR ESSEX W30065601, FROM EXISTING MDF ROOM IN BUILDING 'A' TO EACH PORTABLE BUILDING IDF. ROUTE TO EXISTING EST FIRE ALARM PANEL IN ADMIN. HALL A102 FIRST FLOOR OF BUILDING 'A'. ROUTE IN 3/4" EMT CONDUIT. ROUTE TELECOM AND I/C CABLING TO COMM ROOM A161 ON FIRST FLOOR OF BUILDING 'A'. LOCATE PULL BOXES ON PORTABLES ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING HEIGHT. PROVIDE 2' RIGID STEEL CONDUIT MAST FOR SYSTEMS AERIAL DUCT SUPPORT. PROVIDE HEIGHTS AS REQUIRED TO CLEAR PORTABLE BUILDINGS. PROVIDE ALL MAST SUPPORTS AS REQUIRED. AERIAL DUCT ROUTED BETWEEN MAIN BUILDING AND PORTABLE BUILDING PULL BOXES. £Lft orn iw23 2O1 cm of'ukwi:!> OUILDING UIVISIO CITY OF "I l KWtA APR 05 2319 PERMIT CENTER rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main St. Seattle, WA 98104 p. 206.624.4222 f. 206.624.4226 mail@rolludaarchitects.com _1 A Art\ vtr— TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409.7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com 2 0 0 CC ~OJ -I0 ILL w ca 0JQ i- 0�0 L 0 (0 Ili CC YOB I-0)I— rn co O• to 0? L REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. FLR BT RWA 331-17-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Issue Date: 03-28-2019 Drawing Title SITE PLAN - SYSTEMS Drawing Number E2.OTP rolluda architects r-1 I E) I I D ST. I I DP I I BUILDING D 18 FT MIN. 18 FT MIN. D3 D5 D6 0 DB D9 DIAGRAM NOTES PROVIDE EMT CONDUITS FROM EXISTING DISTRIBUTION' DP' TO LB'S ON OUTSIDE OF BUILDING 'D'. TYPICAL OF (2). PROVIDE WET LOCATION LB'S AND CONNECT CONDUITS FROM BUILDING TO RIGID STEEL CONDUITS AND WEATHER HEADS. TYPICAL OF (2). PROVIDE (2) RIGID STEEL MAST AND WEATHER HEADS AND MOUNT TO BUILDING 'D'. PROVIDE ALL SUPPORT HARDWARE TO SECURELY MOUNT MAST TO BUILDING. FEEDERS TO TRANSITION FROM CONDUIT ROUTED TO AERIAL FEEDERS. SEE POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS. SECURELY ATTACH FEEDERS TO MIDSPAN POLE. MAINTAIN A MINIMUM OF 18 FEET A.F.G. TO LOWEST POINT OF AERIAL FEEDER CABLES. PROVIDE A 30 FOOT UTILITY GRADE POLE WITH A MINIMUM DIAMETER OF 5-1/2 INCHES AT THE TOP. BURY POLE 5-FEET INTO GROUND. ROUTE RIGID STEEL CONDUITS DOWN POLE TO DISCONNECT SWITCH. PROVIDE NEMA 3R DISCONNECT SWITCH. SEE POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM FOR REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE FREESTANDING UNISTRUT MOUNTING HARDWARE FOR ALL DISCONNECT SWITCHES. LOCATE ALL DISCONNECTS ADJACENT TO ASSOCIATED TRANSFORMER. PROVIDE NEMA 3R PAD -MOUNTED DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER. SEE POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. ROUTE CONDUIT AND FEEDERS UNDERGROUND TO PORTABLE PANEL. (E)PC 1 (E)PC I 208/ 1 208/ 1 120V 1 120V 225 225A LMCB_LMCB (E)ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKER TO UTILITY TRANSFORMER (E)PA ; (E)PA ; (E)PA ; 1 208/ 1 208/ 1 208/ 1 1120V1120VI120V1 I I I I LSEC 1�SEC 2j_SEC 3J ,XFMR I < F i (E)TA I .‘• Il L__J 1 480/ 277V '13)300 AF ) 400/3 /1 T-P1 rDB� DS o D�8 y T-P2 PORTABLE POWER SERVICE DIAGRAM NTS rdr 3P21 LNJ 208/ 1 1 120V I 60A 1 LMCB XFMR y T-3P2 y 480V: < ` y 1201208V L _ _ J I15KVA M3 I 480/ 277V 100A LMCB) i 480/ 277V L__J TO PORTABLE P1 r TO PORTABLE P2 TO PORTABLE P3 r 1 (E PE 1 [ (E�DT(E)PD l (E)c2, 1 208/ 1 1 208/ 1 208/ 11 208/ 1 1 120V 1 1 120V 1 120V 11 120V 1 I I I I II I L__J LSECLLSEC2JL__J L j(3)200 AF / 200/3 1 (E)MP I 1 208/ 120V 1- —I— _J r —1XFMR I 1 j I (E)TM %: it L- -J 1 (E)M (E)M (E)M 480/ 1 480/ 1480/ 277V 1 27N 1 277V I 1 1 I LSEC 1_LSEC 2LSEC 3J r (3)100 AF ) 100/3 /1 f (3)600 AF ) 600/3 /1 r I 208/ 120V 1 I I I I L__J r ,XFMR I -'> I(E)TS J 400A BUS 1 < (E) (2) 2"C, (4) #310 8 (1) #3 Cu. GND EACH l L -'(3)100AF / �(3)400AF r(3)175AF ) 100/3 400/3 ) 200/3 /1 1, / 1600A BUS (E)MAIN SWITCHBOARD 480/277V 304W 400A ENCLOSED CB r , XFMR I < j I(E)T-F2 I L__J I 112.5 KVAL _ I XFMR I j y I (E)TF F yf l I Il L__J I 1 IJ(E)LF 480/ 1277V I I I 200 LMLOJ r /1 1 r(E)PF, 208/ 120V 100 LMCB J (3)200 AF 200/3 I (E)KT(E)K I 1208/ 12081 I 120V 1 120V 1 I I LSEC 1j_SEC 2jI XFMR <i (E)TKr I I %'- Il L_LJ I 1 (E)ELEVATOR ri I� I LfiJ T � II r (3)60 AF ) 60/3 /1 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER SCHEDULE No. KVA VOLTAGE/PHASE Y0 Z MANUFACTURER No. PRIMARY SECONDARY T-P1 480/3 120 30 4W 4.5 n �+ #EE75T3HFISCUNL (NEMA 3R) I la T-P2 75 480/3 208/120 30, 4W 4.5 SQ-D #EE75T3HFISCUNL (NEMA 3R) r TEr1rT 1 PORT.1 I PORT. II II II L__J L__J NEMA 3R (3) 60AF 60/3 (E) DISTRIBUTION PANEL 'DP' r(E)M2T(E)M2 1 1 480/ 1 48D/ 1 277V 1 277V I I I LSEC 1_LSEC 2J (3)200 AF ) 200/3 /1 480/ 277V /1 REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTIONS 262200 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS. NEMA 3R (2) 200AF 200/3 NEMA 3R 480V: (3)60 AF 60/3 1 XFMR T-P1 #4 Cu. 400AMP 480/277V 30 4W (E)PG-r(E)PG I I (E)C3 2081 1 208/ 1 1 208/ 1 1 120V 1 120V 1 1 120V 1 I I I I LECIISEC2J L__J J J r , XFMR J I I J_ I - P1 240/ 120V NEMA 3R (3) 80AF 100/3 /1 1 0 O NEMA 3R1�L (2) 200AF L's 200/3 NEMA 3R 480V: 208/120V 75KVA XFMR T-P2 _ O P2 240/ 120V 200A 0 NEMA 3R v (2) 100AF a 100/3 j(3)80 AF 100/3 TYPICAL CIRCUITS TO BE INVERTER BACKED VIA RELAY INV1 LCP1 277V 1 1 4801 1 I H _ _ _< 277V I I I I I L -_ J I L_ TYPICAL CIRCUITS TO BE INVERTER BACKED r(3)200 AF '(3)600 AF✓ (3)150 AF ) 200/3 ) 600/3 ) 200/3 /1 /1 /1 ELECTRICAL PARTIAL ONE —LINE DIAGRAM NTS 1 ris 600/3P L_J #4 Cu. r[T 1 L4 L'J 480/ 277V 10pA I J 1M2 1 208/ 1 120V 1 150A 1 LMCB) O P3 240/ 120V 100A L .1 (3)60 AF / 60/3 I 1 I I I al I I 1 P2 J 208/ 1 2P2 120V 200A I 100A LMCB) LMLOJ r XFMR T-1M2 < i� 1 480V: ` 11120/208V (15KVA ._y_ I XFMR { y I T-1P2 < 480V: 1120/208V 175KVA ELEVATOR 1M4 1480/ I 27N 400A� LMLO J 208/ 120V S 1 S S S ( ti 100/3P , 400/3P 1 1 I I 1. GENERAL NOTES CONTRACTOR TO USE LOCATOR SERVICES FOR ALL CONDUIT TRENCHING AND NEW POWER POLE LOCATIONS. 2. PROVIDE CONCRETE PAD FOR NEW TRANSFORMERS. 3. CONCRETE DISCONNECT SUPPORTS INTO GROUND. 4. PORTABLE CONTRACTOR AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL POWER AND SYSTEMS WORK INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND ASSOCIATED SPECIFICATIONS. PLAN NOTES O PROVIDE (3) 60 AMP DUAL ELEMENT TIME DELAY FUSES IN EXISTING SPARE 60 AMP FUSE SECTION TO SERVE NEW TRANSFORMER T-P1. OPROVIDE (3) 80 AMP DUAL ELEMENT TIME DELAY FUSES IN EXISTING SPARE 100 AMP FUSE SECTION TO SERVE NEW TRANSFORMER T-P2. O PROVIDE 480-208/120 3-PHASE NEMA 3R TRANSFORMER. SEE SHEET E1.OTP FOR LOCATION. O PROVIDE 4-WIRE, 3 FUSE HOLDER NEMA 3R FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH. LOCATE ADJACENT TO SERVING TRANSFORMER. PROVIDE DUAL ELEMENT TIME DELAY FUSES. O ROUTE CONDUIT AND FEEDERS UNDERGROUND FROM FUSE DISCONNECT TO PORTABLE PANEL. O 200 AMP 1-PHASE PANEL PROVIDED WITH PORTABLE. CONNECTED LOAD = 35.85 KVA. O 100 AMP 1-PHASE PANEL PROVIDED WITH PORTABLE. CONNECTED LOAD = 20.90 KVA. O PROVIDE FEEDER WEATHER HEAD AT THIS LOCATION AND TRANSITION FROM FEEDERS IN CONDUIT TO AERIAL FEEDERS. SEE SHEET E1.0TP FOR LOCATION AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 0 CONNECT PORTABLE TO B&C PHASES AT DISCONNECT SWITCH. 0 CONNECT PORTABLE TO A&C PHASES AT DISCONNECT SWITCH. 11 CONNECT PORTABLE TO A&B PHASES AT DISCONNECT SWITCH. 12 AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT UNDER 10K. FEEDER SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION AMP 1-1/4"C, 3 #4 & 1 #10 Cu. GND 70 A 7Q QUADRUPLEX SERVICE DROP 3 INSL #6 & 1 #6 Cu. GND 75 A 1-1/4"C,3#3&1#8Cu.GND 85A 10 QUADRUPLEX SERVICE DROP 3 INSL #4 & 1 #4 Cu. GND 100 A ® 110A 1-1/2"C,4#1&1#6Cu. GND ® 2"C, 4 #2/0 & 1 #4 Cu. GND 200A O1-1/2'C, 3 #1 & 1 #6 Cu. GND 110 A © 2"C, 3 #2/0 & 1 #4 Cu. GND 200 A ALL FEEDERS CONDUCTORS SHALL BE THHN-THWN COPPER(Cu.) CONNECT INSL/ISO GROUND CONDUCTOR FROM PANEL INSLASO GROUND BUS TO MAIN SWITCHBOARD SERVICE GROUND. ELEV2J 208/ 1 120V 60A LMCB) r ,XFMR I I T-ELEV2 < i. 1 480V: < > l 120/208V _ J 13OKVA La iu rail NI LPco cn 150/3P �, 60/3P \, 60/3P \T 150/3P �, 100/3P � 1 , 60/3P I 1 I I I I I DP-B 600A, 480Y/27N, 30, 4W, CORRICY CITY OF s GK`N!L. Mn( 0� 2133 PE.Pay117 CENTER g,v20 2tw .h) O( TVaWii t${L01NG ;YV Sp ON architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main St. Seattle, WA 98104 p. 206.624.4222 f. 206.624.4226 mail@rolludaarchitects.com _I A Art\ kit TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409.7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com grQCO- <0 _ J O O Y CnE W .N...dx�w33 4.H01H- rll---I—u REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. FLR BT RWA 331-17-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Issue Date: 03-28-2019 Drawing Title POWER ONE -LINE DIAGRAMS AND NOTES Drawing Number E3.OTP (E) (5) 4"C, (4) #SDOMCM Cu. EACH rolluda architects PANEL LE LOCATION: SERVING: FED FROM: P.E. STORAGE 480/277 VOLT 220 AMP MAIN LUGS ONLY SCCR: EXISTING 3 PHASE AFC: 14,000 A 4 WRE MOLNTNG: FLUSH (E) MSG CKT LOAD DESCRIPTION TYPE KVA NP PHASE NP KVA TYPE LOAD DESCRIPTION CKT 1 LIGHTING L 3.135 20/1 A 2011 3.620 L LIGHTING 2 3 LIGHTING L 3.000 20/1 B 20/1 3.360 L LIGHTING 4 5 LIGHTING L 1.300 20/1 C 20/1 3.070 L LIGHTING 6 7 SPARE 5 - 20/1 A 20/1 2.830 L LIGHTING 8 9 SPARE S - 20/1 B 20/1 2.125 L LIGHTING 10 11 LIGHTING L 1.280 20/1 C 20/1 2.885 L LIGHTING 12 13 AHU-D01 M - - 3.795 - - 20/3 - - A 20/1 - 5 SPARE 14 15 B 20/1 - S SPARE 16 17 C 2011 - S SPARE 18 19 AHU-D02 M - - 3.795 - - 203 - - A 20/3 - - 2.070 - - M - - EF-D01 20 21 B 22 23 C 24 25 AMJ-D03 M - - 3.795 - - 203 - - A 20/3 - - 1.440 - - M - - EF-D02 26 27 8 28 29 C 30 31 SPACE S - 50d1 A 50/1 - S SPACE 32 33 SPACE S - 50'1 B 50/1 - S SPACE 34 35 SPACE S - 50/1 C 50/1 - 5 SPACE 36 37 TRANSFORMER TE P - - 57.730 - - 125/3 - - A 30/3 - - 0.000 - - D - - SURGE SUPPRESSOR 38 39 B 40 41 C 42 PHASE LOAD PHASE A= 37.69 KVA PHASE B= 31.50 KVA PHASE C- 29.99 KVA LOAD TYPE L R M H WH D A K LM TOTAL LOADS PANEL LE 26.61 14.90 0.00 3.80 41.50 KVA 49.92 AMP PANEL PE 3.96 6.01 0.80 2.68 1.13 13.45 KVA 16.18 AAP PANELS PD SEC1, 2 11.16 0.30 32.82 0.30 44.28 KVA 53.26 PAP CONN. LOAD 26.61 15.12 21.21 0.60 35.50 3.80 99.23 KVA 119.36 AMP CALC. LOAD 33.26 12.58 21.21 0.80 35.50 0.95 104.27 KVA 125.42 AMP NOTES: SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY, NO WORK AT THIS PANEL PANEL LF LOCATION: SERVING: FED FROM: P.E. STORAGE 480/277 VOLT 200 A AP MAN LUGS ONLY SCCR: EXISTING 3 PHASE AFC: 4 WRE MOUNTING: SURFACE DP CKT LOAD DESCRIPTION TYPE KVA MP PHASE AP KVA TYPE LOAD DESCRIPTION CKT 1 LIGHTNG L 3.720 20/1 A 20/3 - - 10.143 - - M - - FCU-001 2 3 LIGHTING L 3.720 20/1 8 4 5 SPARE S - 20/1 C 6 7 SPARE S - 20/1 A 20/1 - S SPARE 8 9 SPARE S - 20/1 B 20/1 - S SPARE 10 11 UGHTNG L 0.816 20/1 C 20/1 2.216 L OUTSIDE LIGHTING 12 13 LIGHTNG L 0.105 20/1 A 20/1 - S SPARE 14 15 SPARE S - 20/1 8 20/1 - S SPARE 16 17 SPARE S - 20/1 C 20/1 - S SPARE 18 19 SPARE S - 2011 A 20/1 - S SPARE 20 21 DOAS-04 M - - 10.974 - - 20/3 - - B 20/1 - S SPARE TRANSFORMER T-PF (PNL'PF) 22 23 C 50/3 - - 24.521 - - P - - 24 25 A 26 27 SPACE S - - B 28 29 SPACE S - - C - - S SPACE 30 31 TRANSFORMER T-F2 (PORTABLES) P - - 71.692 - - 100/3 - - A - - S SPACE 32 33 8 - - S SPACE 34 35 C - - S SPACE 36 37 SPD D - - 0.000 - - 30/3 - - A - - S SPACE 38 39 8 - - S SPACE 40 41 C - - S SPACE 42 PHASE LOAD PHASE A= 56.29 KVA PHASE 8= 53.52 KVA PHASE C- 18.09 KVA LOAD TYPE L R M H WH D A K LM TOTAL LOADS PANEL LF 10.58 21.12 0.00 10.97 31.69 KVA 38.12 AMP PANEL 'PE 2.34 20.88 1.30 8.76 24.52 KVA 29.49 AMP XFMRST-F1, T-F2 2.08 7.20 1642 40.00 6.00 2.83 71.69 KVA 86.23 ANP CONN. LOAD 12.65 9.54 58.41 40.00 7.30 10.97 127.91 KVA 153.85 AMP CALC. LOAD 15.82 9.54 58.41 40.00 7.30 2.74 i 133.81 KVA 160.95 MP NOTES: SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY, NO WORK AT THIS PANEL. SHOWALTER MIDDLE SCHOOL LOAD CALCULATIONS 1600 AMP MAIN SWITCHBOARD MAXIMUM DEMAND LOAD FROM 12/17 TO 12/18-------------------------------- = 313.840 KW POWER FACTOR CONVERSION Qa .90------------------------------ ------------ = 3413.711 KVA PER NEC 220-87-------- 348.71 x 1.25------------------------- = 435.889 KVA NEW PORTABLE LOAD ADDED DIST.'DP'------------------ ----- ------- ---- - + 92.588 KVA NEW LOAD ADDED RECENT SCHOOL ADDITION ----------------------------- + 325.108 KVA NEW TOTAL LOAD 853.585 KVA 853.585 KVA / .831 = 1027.178 AMPS EXIST PANEL DP LOCATION: SERVING: FED FROM: BUILDING ID' 480/277 VOLT 400 AMP MAIN LUGS ONLY SCCR: EXISTING 3 PHASE AFC: 4 IMRE MOUNTING: FLOOR BLDG'D' 8 PORTABLES (E)MSB LOAD TYPE L R M H WH D A K LM TOTAL LOADS PANEL DP KVA AMP PANEL LF 12.65 9.54 58.41 40.00 7.30 10.97 127.91 KVA 153.85 AMP PANEL LE 26.61 15.12 21.21 0.80 35.50 3.80 99.23 KVA 119.36 MVP XFMR T-P1 (P1) 1.04 3.60 8.21 20.00 3.00 2.83 35.85 KVA 43.12 AMP XFMR T-P2 (P2, P3) 1.59 6.84 12.31 30.00 6.00 5.66 56.74 KVA 68.25 AMP CONN. LOAD 41.89 35.10 100.14 90.00 0.80 51.80 10.97 319.73 KVA 384.57 AMP CALC. LOAD 52.36 22.55 100.14 90.00 0.80 51.80 2.74 320.39 KVA 385.37 AMP NOTES: E uct%Po19, r NEVtE:ti'E- KffS . ?'� F2Z 9rNC y•e NAY 2 C Z019 1 Clty a! Tukwi!9 1.:.:UlW1NG DIViS!ON RECEIVED C ITTI El0~LiUC,TbII LA APR 0 5 2019 PERMIT CENTER L = LIGHTING LOAD, DEMAND AT 125% R = RECEPTACLE LOAD, DEMAND PER NEC 220.44 M = MECH EQUIP HEAT PUMP, MOTOR LOAD, DEMAND AT 100% H = SPACE HEATING LOAD, DEMAND AT 100% WH= WATER HEATER, DEMAND AT 100% D = DEDICATED CIRCUIT OR MISC LOAD, DEMAND AT 100% A = APPLIANCE LOAD, DEMAND PER NEC 220.55, COLUMN -A K = KITCHEN LOAD, DEMAND PER NEC 220.56 LM= LARGEST MOTOR LOAD, DEMAND AT 25% ADD. architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main St. Seattle, WA 98104 p. 206.624.4222 f. 206.624.4226 mail@rolludaarchitects.com frnIt• 44-Mc ticTRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com REVISION DATE Design: FLR Drawn: BT Checked: RWA Project No. 331-17-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Issue Date: 03-28-2019 Drawing Title PANEL SCHED. AND LOAD CALCULATIONS Drawing Number E4.OTP GENERAL NOTES rolluda architects (E)FIRE ALARM REMOTE GRAPHIC E- LED ANNUNCIATOR (E)) 1/1 r EXISTING EST 101000 F.A. PANEL 1 L J 1 1 (E)BATTERY CABINET NEW FA-NAC PANEL 911 I ATI 8 NEW AUDIONISUAL ALARM CIRCUIT TYPICAL NEW AUDIONISUAL ALARM CIRCUIT TYPICAL ❑ A NEW AUDIONISUAL ALARM CIRCUIT TYPICAL 120V DEDICATED CIRCUIT FOR NAC BOOSTER PANEL I I PER MANUFACTURE REQUIREMENTS. BUILDING A IDF ROOM SECOND FLOOR BUILDING A IDF ROOM SECOND FLOOR BUILDING A ADMIN. A102 HALLWAY ® O FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EXISTING ONE -LINE DIAGRAM N.T.S. NEW FIRE ALARM SLC LOOP DEVICES AND DETECTORS NEW FIRE ALARM SLC LOOP DEVICES AND DETECTORS NEW FIRE ALARM SLC LOOP DEVICES AND DETECTORS FIRE ALARM NOTES: 1. PROVIDE ALL J-BOXES, CONDUIT, WIRING & CONNECTIONS TO ALL DEVICES FOR COMPLETE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM. 2. ALL DEVICES WILL BE MOUNTED IN AN ACCESSIBLE SPACE AND AT THE ELEVATION PER NFPA 72, ADA, AND AHJ CODES. 3. PROVIDE FLUSH MOUNT BACK BOXES FOR ALL DEVICES IN ALL FINISHED SPACE. 4. PROVIDE COMPLETE GROUNDING TO EQUIPMENT PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATION. 5. SEE FIRE ALARM SPECIFICATION FOR COMPLETE DETAILS. 6. SET ALL VISUAL DEVICES TO PROVIDE THE RIGHT COVERAGE OF CANDELA FOR THE SPACE PER NFPA 72 AND AHJ CODES. 7. SET ALL AUDIO DEVICES TO TEMPORAL AND TO BE 15dB ABOVE AMBIENT SOUND LEVEL OF THE ROOM PER NFPA 72 CODES TABLE. B. ALL AUDIO AND VISUAL DEVICE WILL BE SYNC PER NFPA 72 CODES. 1. THE 101000 FIRE ALARM PANEL WILL BE NEWLY INSTALLED DURING SHOWALTER M.S. RENOVATIONS PRIOR TO THE PORTABLE BUILDING FIRE ALARM INSTALLATION. IN ORDER TO MAINTAIN THE WARRANTY OF THE NEW PANEL, THE PORTABLE BUILDING FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR SHALL HIRE THE COMPANY THAT INSTALLED THE EST 101000 PANEL TO TERMINATE AND PROGRAM THE NEW PORTABLE FIRE ALARM CIRCUITS AT THE MAIN FIRE ALARM PANEL TO MAINTAIN THE WARRANTY. 2. PORTABLE CONTRACTOR AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL POWER AND SYSTEMS WORK INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND ASSOCIATED SPECIFICATIONS. O PLAN NOTES PROVIDE NEW ADDRESSABLE NAC BOOSTER PANEL IN SECOND FLOOR IDF ROOM. PROVIDE CONNECTIONS TO NEW FIRE ALARM DEVICES IN PORTABLE BUILDINGS. CONNECT NEW FIRE ALARM NAC BOOSTER PANEL TO EXISTING EST 101000 PANEL IN ADMIN. A102 HALL AREA ON 1ST FLOOR. EXISTING F.A. CIRCUITS AND DEVICES ARE NOT SHOWN. AERIAL CABLING. SEE SHEET E2.0TP FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. PULL BOXES LOCATED ON PORTABLES. ELftOflt REVIE'�V� crk'„_ OOMPLIAI ::.•P : s scot :+' FUY2£' 2014 tity 911 �4HWIIP QUILDIHG DIVIStCo, IIECENEP CITY OF Tt3 KW'ILA APR 05 2019 PERMIT CENTER architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main St. Seattle, WA 98104 p. 206.624.4222 f. 206.624.4226 mail@rolludaarchitects.com "Thik tkort TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.coln c0 0 0�/ Ld- 0) cso H 0 < 02U 1- co _1 co ❑ J Q 1-1 rye O • 00O G 0_ (n W J Q0_ 0 02 F—U)I-- LI CO CD CCr rn 0) = < REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. FLR BCY RWA 331-17-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Issue Date: 03-28-2019 Drawing Title FIRE ALARM ONE -LINE DIAGRAM Drawing Number E5.OTP rolluda architects SRC 5—E—S ESS ESS ESS ESS SPEAKERS TYPICAL. QUANTITY AS SHOWN ON DRAWINGS 5 IR RECEIVER ON CEILING 3/4"C p 3/4"C WITH — WITH PULL t BELDEN 5300 STRING PROVIDE (1) 6-CONDUCTOR, 1-PAIR SHIELDED, 2-PAIR UN -SHIELDED #22 AWG WEST PENN AQC373 INDOOR/OUTDOOR RATED INTERCOM/CLOCK CABLING FROM EACH PORTABLE TO IC HEAD END IN COMMROOM A161 IN BUILDING 'A'. STRUCTURAL CEILING SUSPENDED CEILING VOLUME CONTROL C6) AUDIO 3/4"C WITH BELDEN 9451 SS J-BOX WITH SINGLE GANG MUD RING 1-114" GROMMET HOLE tb +60'AFF SSA SOUND SYSTEM AMPLIFIER WITH SHELF ROUTE CABLING VIA AERIAL RACEWAY. PULL BOX MOUNTED TO PORTABLE EXTERIOR WALL PROVIDE MINIMUM 3/4' CONDUIT IN ALL NON -ACCESSIBLE AREAS, EXPOSED OPEN AREAS AND ROOF TOPS EMERGENCY/NORMAL CALL SWITCH DIGITAL CLOCK SPEAKER r FININSHED FLOOR 3/4"C WITH CAT 6 FLUSH MOUNT 12 x1Tx1• NEMA-1 J-BOX O VGA HDMI O 0 3.5MM AV1 1-1/2'C WITH PULL SPRING 55 J-BOX WITH SINGLE GANG MUD RING 1-1/4' GROMMET HOLE ROOF ATTIC SPACE ®� RECEIVER WITH AUDIO DE -EMBEDDING (TYPICAL) AV3 VY+102"AFF SHORT -THROW PROJECTOR (OFOI) 2 *V�{� +18'AFF TEACHER DESK —5S J-BOX WITH SINGLE GANG MUD RING CLASSROOM AV DIAGRAM N.T.S. PORTABLE BUILDING INTERCOM CLOCK/SPEAKER DIAGRAM (TYPICAL) N.T.S. NOTES: SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 272000 FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. CONTACT BEN SWERK AT ELECTROCOM 1-425-774-6600 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3/4"C —0 WITH CAT 6 DUAL RJ-45 JACK INSERT FOR UTP VGA HDMI 0 3.5MM DROP CEILING LINE AV2 r—WALL VIDEO if PROJECTOR SCREEN 2 *®+18"AFF � -5S J-BOX WITH SINGLE GANG MUD RING FINISHED FLOOR JACK IDENTIFICATION P1-1-1e P1-1-2 BLANK FILLERPLATE TYPICAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS WALL OUTLET DETAIL N.T.S. AV SYSTEM NOTES: 1. PROVIDE A 1-1/2-INCH CONDUIT FROM 12'x12"x4' J-BOX TO AV3. 2. PROVIDE POWER RECEPTACLE FOR NEMA 1 J-BOX, SHORT -THROW PROJECTOR, SOUND SYSTEM AMPLIFIER AND AT AV1 & AV2 LOCATIONS. MOUNT PER MANUFACTURE INSTRUCTION. 3. COORDINATE ALL WORK WITH AV CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 4. COORDINATE ALL AV EQUIPMENT ELEVATIONS AND LOCATIONS WITH OWNER AND ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. NOTES: 1. PROVIDE 5 SQUARE BACK BOXES WITH A SINGLE GANG FACEPLATE AT ALL TELECOM OUTLET LOCATIONS. 2. DETAILS ARE SHOWN AS A GUIDELINE AND ARE NOT A REPRESENTATION OF EVERY SITUATION. 3. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 271000 FOR MORE REQUIREMENTS. 4. SEE FLOOR PLANS WHERE SUB -NUMBER IN SYMBOL INDICATES QUANTITIES OF DROPS PER OUTLET. 5. VERIFY ALL LABELING REQUIREMENTS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO WORK. ROOM NUMBER 1 P1 2 P1 3 P1 ifPATCH PANEL PORT NUMBER 4 P1 5 P1 6 ETC. PATCH PANEL LABELING EXAMPLE N.T.S. NOTE: PROVIDE STATION JACK ROOM NUMBER ON PATCH PANEL AT EACH CORRESPONDING PORT NUMBER. P1-1-1,2 IDF-PI PATCH PANEL NUMBER — NUMBER ON STATION JACK TO MATCH PORT NUMBER ON CORRESPONDING PATCH PANEL. NUMBERING WILL START AT MAIN DOOR OF THE ROOM AND PROCEED IN A CLOCKWISE ROTATION. ®UTP STATION JACK IDENTIFICATION CODE N.T.S. NOTES: VERIFY ALL LABELING REQUIREMENTS WITH OWNER PRIOR TO WORK. (TYP. 2) 0 0 O 0000:11 000® 000000 000000 000000 000000000000000.00 I I I 0000e0 000000 000000 O 00000 000000 000m0 000000 I LOCATE RECEPTACLE IN CABINET PORTABLE IDF CABINETS IDF-P1 - PORTABLE P1 (TYPICAL IDF P2 & P3) NO SCALE E) DATA RISER DIAGRAM N.T.S. GENERAL NOTES 1. SEE SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 271000 AND FOR PRODUCTS AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS OF THE TELECOMMUNICATION DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM. 2. ALL UTP AND FIBER OPTIC CABLES ARE TO BE TERMINATED USING THEIR APPROPRIATE TERMINATING DEVICE AS CALLED FOR ON PLANS AND IN THE SPECIFICATIONS. 3. ALL PENETRATIONS MADE THROUGH FIRE RATED WALLS/ FLOORS SHALL BE FIRE SEALED PER CODE. 4. NO SECTION OF CONDUIT SHALL BE LONGER THAN 100FT. OR CONTAIN MORE THAN TWO 90° BENDS BETWEEN PULL BOXES. 5. ALL TELECOM OUTLET BACK BOXES SHALL. BE 4 SQUARE WITH A SINGLE GANG MUD RING. 6. TELECOM CONDUITS SHALL BE MIN. 3/4'. 7. PORTABLE CONTRACTOR AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL POWER AND SYSTEMS WORK INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND ASSOCIATED SPECIFICATIONS. O O O O O O O PLAN NOTES SEE PORTABLE BUILDING FLOOR PLANS FOR LOCATIONS OF TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLETS. PROVIDE QUANTITY OF CAT 6 DROPS PER OUTLET AS INDICATED ADJACENT TELECOM SYMBOL ON FLOOR PLANS. ALL CABLING WILL PUNCH DOWN ON PATCH PANELS IN THE DATA CABINET AND THEN WILL BE PATCHED FOR VOICE OR DATA WITH PATCH CORDS. SEE THIS SHEET AND SPECIFICATION 271000 FOR ADDITIONAL OUTLET REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE EATON WALL MOUNT CABINET FOR IDF EQUIPMENT. PROVIDE VLWM3625PB WALL MOUNT CABINET. PROVIDE WITH COOLING FAN OPTION. PROVIDE UTP WIRE MANAGEMENT PANELS AS SHOWN. OR-808044915. PROVIDE RACK MOUNTED CAT. 6 MODULAR TO 110 UTP PATCH PANEL AND TERMINATE ALL HORIZONTAL UTP CABLES. OR-PHD66U48. PROVIDE RACK MOUNTED FIBER OPTIC DISTRIBUTION PATCH PANEL AND TERMINATE ALL FIBER OPTIC CABLES. OR-FCO2U-P WITH OR-OFP-LCD12 LC ADAPTER PANEL. GROUND CABINET TO CLOSEST NEC RECOGNIZED GROUND. PROVIDE #6 AWG INSULATED Cu. GROUND FROM GROUND LUG ON CABINET TO GROUND. GROUND LUG ON CABINET TO BE EATON. ROUTE TO FIBER OPTIC PATCH PANEL IN EXISTING MDF RACK AND TERMINATE ALL STRANDS. PROVIDE FIBER OPTIC LIU'S IN EXISTING COMM ROOM A161 AND TERMINATE ALL FIBER OPTIC CABLES FROM EACH PORTABLE. UTP/FIBER CABLE SCHEDULE TYPE DESCRIPTION REMARKS OFOUR PAIR UTP CATEGORY 6 CABLE FOR DATA, QUANTITY PER DEVICE AS NOTED ON FLOOR PLANS 1 2 O(1) 6 STRAND MULTIMODE INDOOR/OUTDOOR FIBER OPTIC CABLE 3,4 SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. UTP CABLE TO BEROUTEO FROM OUTLETS IN CONDUITS TO ACCESSIBLE CEIUNG SPACE THEN THROUGH J-HOOKS TO IDE AS INDICATED. 2. ALL TELECOMMUMUTION CABLES SHALL BE TERMINATED AT A PATCH PANEL. 3. ROUTE IN DEDICATED 1" INNERDUCT THROUGH CONDUIT SYSTEM. 4. ROUTE IN AERIAL DUCT FROM PORTABLE TO MAIN BUILDING. E LI 9-• OM el -. 'iEVTE1OOMPLANC i`:5K E 'V:oc'�p i 4Y2C 2015 ZIty ut TJKwa'. 4UILD* G DIVISION RECEAVED Cr? Y of uta ILA APR 05 2U73 PERMIT CENTER architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main St. Seattle, WA 98104 p. 206.624.4222 f. 206.624.4226 mail@rolludaa rchitects.com "cm\ 44-11V— TRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com GO 2 0 cc co 0O J 0 CO 000 ® W J Q LL. O 02 I—en1- REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. FLR BT RWA 331-17-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Issue Date: 03-28-2019 Drawing Title SYSTEMS ONE -LINE DIAGRAMS Drawing Number E6.OTP BE1 BD1 BC1-- BA1 (B4) L AD AB) \ SCIENCE LAa L BI!B... ; ( B3 ) -t/ V — —J (E)CR -- OFFICE 3fi��1i 9Y€fl!! V;N ei. '9ii:4S5Ji' •nu•u, e111e messreeeeet • S ! LS!-eV/I!!!. 1iCHANK:AU E' FCICUST ( A3 ELEV CL RIC3A / CREA• °ARNINGLAN (El OFFICE A131 1, 3FF€GE OUTDOOR LEARNING AREA EC ATCH ':JQ (E) OFFICE Alta ' ( A4 T - —(BE) 0 (E)TRANSFORMER (E) OFFICE ; A' 93... CUSLS (E) STAFF LOUNGE E;ATTENDANC I A119 j (E) OFFICE STOR (E)ISS A114 I (E) • KE I A135 MEN 136 WOME 1i131 WORKROOM A121 (E)WALK IN FREEZER {E) MECHBEOILER A.144 (E) KITCHEN A139 E) GIRLS (E1 BOYS A151 (E) HALL A132 - (E)OFFICE A113 UP 1 b tt'^ ' )(LET (E) OFFICE (E1 OF A4.1 A4.2 GENERAL NOTES 1. PORTABLE CONTRACTOR AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL POWER AND SYSTEMS WORK INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND ASSOCIATED SPECIFICATIONS. 2. PROVIDE ALL WALL AND CEILING PENETRATIONS AS REQUIRED FOR CONDUIT ROUTING. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS. PLAN NOTES O EXISTING FIRE ALARM PANEL IS LOCATED IN ADMIN. HALL A102. OINTERCOM HEAD END IS LOCATED IN COMM ROOM A161. O MDF IS LOCATED IN COMM ROOM A161. O EXISTING TELECOM AND INTERCOM CONDUITS ARE ROUTED FROM THE EXISTING 2ND FLOOR CABLE TRAY SYSTEM INTO THE COMM ROOM. OEXISTING DISTRIBUTION 'DP'. OPROVIDE NEW POWER CONDUIT FROM DIST.'DP' THROUGH EAST WALL AND CEILING SPACE TO EXTERIOR OF BUILDING. OAERIAL ROUTING TO POWER POLES ADJACENT NEW PORTABLES. SEE E1.0TP FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. A4.7 COMMONS ADM • A141 [ r n a o a (E STUDENT AI 2 r (E)OFFICE "- .1 BUILDING FLOOR PLAN 1ST FLOOR SCALE: 1/16•= 1'-0' (El COMMONS ) A146 ; j\\ 1\\ 1 1 A4.9 COVERED WALKWAY [-]L )E) CORRIDOR Ain: 1 E; COTS ...''.iP _. FlCE J (E)RECEPTUtt A108 UP L (E HALL An34 (E)I,OBBY UP r9] UP L. ®N (A5) (A6) (A7) (C1) C2 `1- ( CD )— El h 0 • UP •/ c%/ //, •• (E) CONE A 3 7 (E) VEST. I?., ELECT IEj CLASSROOM A11r' VESTLuL- UP (E) LIBRARY A155 (E)CHECKOU - Ai c (C3) 1 1 r t (C5) IGYM ALCOVE II _- r —L--- 1- 1 1 1 I 1 1 (E) GYMNASIUM (E) COVERED WALKWAY IE) PRODU IE)RESOURCE CENTER A15 r'1 ;E; HA1, (E) CLASSROOM j As75 0 (E) WCAT 1 L... C106. (C6) (C7C7.4(C8) I I 1 1 1 y1(E)STORAGE -- — + ---+ � I fi. 1 (E) VEST (E) COURT YARD (E) AUXILIARY GYM (E) DUST (E) GIRLS' LOCKER RM (E) SHOWERS (E) TOI (E) UNIFORM STORAGE (E) TOI a (E) VESTIBULE I r<:67 V\y .)'(E) CUSTODIAL _ A169 (E) GIRLS A�66 i (E) VEST E) P.E. FFIC: (E) BOYS' LOCKER RM (E) SHOWERS (E)STORAGE (E) CUSTODIAL (E) SEPARATION WALL 7 r—(CD) CC ) \ CB) CA) EL19-Ofl? 11 ASSROOM ' ig VI'.M CFO 1G0 PLi E)An 1 e R1F?= 70 mac, VIZ 2CZOV city of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEiVEn • CITY OF ) UKWILA APR 05 2019 PERMIT CENTER rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main St. Seattle, WA 98104 p. 206.624.4222 f. 206.624.4226 mail@rolludaarchitects.com v STRES WEST ENGINEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone:253.472.3300 www.treswest.com REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. FLR BT RWA 331-17-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Issue Date: 03-28-2019 Drawing Title BUILDING FLOOR PLAN 1ST FLOOR Drawing Number E7.OTP KEYPLAN ( B2) B18 1 I (AB CB1 BOYSRES'ROOM 64i d CIASfR0.011 321.11 COVERED BRIDGE CLASSROOM AtL)o ROOF 1 GENERAL NOTES 1. PORTABLE CONTRACTOR AND THEIR SUBCONTRACTORS SHALL PROVIDE AND INSTALL ALL POWER AND SYSTEMS WORK INDICATED ON THESE DRAWINGS AND ASSOCIATED SPECIFICATIONS. 2. PROVIDE ALL WALL AND CEILING PENETRATIONS AS REQUIRED FOR CONDUIT ROUTING. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS. 0 0 0 0 0 PLAN NOTES EXISTING CABLE TRAY AND CONDUITS LOCATED ABOVE ACT SHALL BE USED TO ROUTE INTERCOM/CLOCK AND TELECOM CABLING FROM PORTABLES TO THE INTERCOM/CLOCK AND TELECOM HEAD ENDS IN THE FIRST FLOOR VIA THE EXISTING CABLE TRAY AND CONDUIT SYSTEM. EXISTING CONDUITS ROUTED DOWN TO COMM ROOM A161 BELOW. AERIAL CABLING TO PORTABLES ROUTED FROM PATCH/IDF ROOM A224. SEE SITE PLAN SYSTEMS SHEET E2.0TP FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND REQUIREMENTS. PROVIDE ADDRESSABLE NAC BOOSTER PANEL IN ROOM A224 FOR FIRE ALARM NAC CIRCUITS TO NEW PORTABLES. ROUTE FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT CONNECTIONS FROM NEW NAC BOOSTER PANEL TO EXISTING FIRE ALARM PANEL IN ADMIN. HALL A102 BLDG A 1ST FLOOR. PROVIDE A COMPLETE CONDUIT SYSTEM FOR ALL FIRE ALARM CIRCUITING. PROVIDE 120 VOLT CIRCUIT FOR NEW NAC BOOSTER PANEL. CONNECT TO EXISTING FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT PG/39. EXISTING POWER PANEL 'PG IN ELECTRICAL ROOM A230. EXISTING IDF RACK SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. - — —( AG ) I `\ CLASSROOM A21 GIRLS A214 ROOF C • A4.7 BOYS tbs OPEN TO COMMONS BELOW 28 (E) C ORR:r A4.9 TEACHERS' PREP I9-N\ •. AJ? �V CLASSROOM ILO-'Inf CLASSROOM A2U4 BUILDING FLOOR PLAN 2ND FLOOR SCALE: 1 /16" = 1'-0" 9N LOBBY DN LAB A216 ELEC (E)ELEVATOR 31-- c23s Ar31 (CD CORRIDOR .A203 C7.4 ( A6 ) CL 3SROOM X12S L ROOF C) 8 -...----- 1 1 1 I I (E) ROOF I 1 I I 1 I I 1 _.. .. . _ I r (E)ROOF ;• OPEN (E) ROOF (E)ROOF OPEN (E)ROOF [1 CLASSROOM (E) ROOF (E) ROOF _T Mt- L___itf_J ri CLASSROOM GIRLS I_..A222 Elal 67-011 SSR00N A226 1A4 r I VIEWEy^. OOMPLIA NC:E. Vrq_, 7C. RA CZ 2 C 2019 $6I CAW of Tukvlts L UILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUK ILA APR 052019 PERMIT CENTER (AB) rolluda architects architecture planning interior design 105 S. Main St. Seattle, WA 98104 p. 206.624.4222 f. 206.624.4226 mail@rolludaarchitects.com frn'\ TRES ENGINWESTEERS TRES WEST ENGINEERS, INC. 2702 SOUTH 42ND STREET, SUITE 301 TACOMA, WA 98409-7315 Phone: 253.472.3300 www.treswest.com F Wo !W a0 0 CC a a - g (n - v co N Y Z -'It - JX ✓ HDO H"tr F—DF- LL eit 1- 1- 0 w °1 REVISION DATE Design: Drawn: Checked: Project No. FLR BT RWA 331-17-01 Issuance PERMIT SET Issue Date: 03-28-2019 Drawing Title BUILDING FLOOR PLAN 2ND FLOOR Drawing Number E8.OTP KEYPLAN